ZyXEL Communications 5VZ-A2011 Wireless router with VDSL2/ADSL broadband access User Manual ZyBook2
ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless router with VDSL2/ADSL broadband access ZyBook2
user manual
www.zyxel.com
CellPipe 7130 RG
Wireless router with VDSL2/ADSL broadband access
Copyright © 2010
Firmware Version 0.0.02.GEN
Default Login Details
IP Address http://192.168.1.1
User Name admin
root
tech
Password telus
About This User's Guide
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 3
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the CellPipe 7130 RG
using the web configurator.
Related Documentation
Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It
contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet
access.
Document Conventions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
4
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The CellPipe 7130 RG may be referred to as the “CellPipe 7130 RG”, the
“device”, the “system” or the “product” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,
[ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the
[ENTER] key. “Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined
choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For
example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click
Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the
Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value.
For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may
denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other
words”.
Document Conventions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 5
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The CellPipe 7130
RG icon is not an exact representation of your device.
CellPipe 7130 RG Computer Notebook computer
Server DSLAM Firewall
Telephone Switch Router
Safety Warnings
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
6
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming
pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk
of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to
dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should
service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in
North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the
product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause
electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power
source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a
new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your
device.
• Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using
the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
• If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will
be damaged.
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE
stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical
and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and
electronic equipment should be treated separately.
Contents Overview
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 7
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ...........................................................................................................................17
Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................................................. 19
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................... 29
Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 83
Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................89
Status Screens .......................................................................................................................... 91
WAN Setup .............................................................................................................................. 101
LAN Setup ............................................................................................................................... 131
Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 139
Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 171
File Sharing ............................................................................................................................. 181
Media Server ........................................................................................................................... 187
Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 191
Certificate ................................................................................................................................ 197
Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 209
Policy Forwarding .................................................................................................................... 213
RIP ........................................................................................................................................... 217
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................... 219
Dynamic DNS Setup ................................................................................................................ 237
Remote Management ..............................................................................................................239
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 245
Parental Control ....................................................................................................................... 257
IGMP ....................................................................................................................................... 261
System Settings ....................................................................................................................... 267
Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 271
Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 275
Diagnostic ................................................................................................................................ 283
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 289
Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 297
Contents Overview
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
8
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 9
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide..........................................................................................................3
Document Conventions............................................................................................................4
Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................6
Contents Overview ...................................................................................................................7
Table of Contents......................................................................................................................9
Part I: User’s Guide................................................................................ 17
Chapter 1
Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG.........................................................................................19
1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 19
1.2 Ways to Manage the CellPipe 7130 RG .............................................................................. 19
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................... 20
1.4 Applications for the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................................... 20
1.4.1 Internet Access ..........................................................................................................20
1.4.2 HomePNA ..................................................................................................................22
1.4.3 CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB Support .............................................................................. 22
1.5 Hardware Connections ........................................................................................................ 24
1.6 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................... 26
1.7 The RESET Button .............................................................................................................. 28
1.8 The WLAN Button ................................................................................................................ 28
1.9 The WPS Button .................................................................................................................. 28
Chapter 2
Tutorials...................................................................................................................................29
2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 29
2.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network ...................................................................................... 29
2.2.1 Example Parameters .................................................................................................. 30
2.2.2 Configuring the AP ..................................................................................................... 30
2.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client .................................................................................. 32
2.3 HomePNA Example Setup .................................................................................................. 39
2.4 How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs ........................................................................... 40
2.4.1 Configuring PVCs ....................................................................................................... 41
2.4.2 Setting Policy Forwarding .......................................................................................... 51
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
10
2.5 How to Allow Out-of-band Remote Management from the WAN ......................................... 53
2.5.1 Configuring Multiple WAN Connections ..................................................................... 54
2.5.2 Configuring Remote Management ............................................................................. 64
2.5.3 Testing the Connection ............................................................................................... 65
2.6 Using the Media Server Feature ......................................................................................... 65
2.6.1 Configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG ............................................................................. 65
2.6.2 Using Windows Media Player .................................................................................... 66
2.6.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter .................................................................................... 69
2.7 Using the File Sharing Feature ............................................................................................ 71
2.7.1 Set Up File Sharing .................................................................................................... 71
2.7.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ............................................................. 71
2.8 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding ......................................................................................... 72
2.9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ................................................... 74
2.10 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ......................................................................... 77
2.11 Access the CellPipe 7130 RG Using DDNS ...................................................................... 80
2.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ................................................... 81
2.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your CellPipe 7130 RG ......................................................... 81
2.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ......................................................................................... 82
Chapter 3
Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................83
3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 83
3.2 User Levels .......................................................................................................................... 83
3.2.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................ 84
3.3 Web Configurator Main Screen ........................................................................................... 85
3.3.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 86
3.3.2 Main Window ..............................................................................................................88
3.3.3 Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 88
Part II: Technical Reference.................................................................. 89
Chapter 4
Status Screens ........................................................................................................................91
4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 91
4.2 Status Screen ...................................................................................................................... 91
4.2.1 WAN Service Statistics ............................................................................................... 94
4.2.2 Route Info ................................................................................................................... 96
4.2.3 WLAN Station List ...................................................................................................... 97
4.2.4 LAN Statistics ............................................................................................................. 98
4.2.5 Client List ................................................................................................................... 99
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 11
Chapter 5
WAN Setup.............................................................................................................................101
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 101
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 102
5.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 103
5.3 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................... 104
5.4 The Mode Screen .............................................................................................................. 104
5.5 The Connect Screen .......................................................................................................... 105
5.5.1 Connect Configuration ............................................................................................. 107
5.6 The Services Screen ..........................................................................................................110
5.6.1 WAN Connection Configuration ................................................................................112
5.7 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 123
Chapter 6
LAN Setup..............................................................................................................................131
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 131
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 131
6.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................... 132
6.3 The LAN IP Screen ............................................................................................................ 133
6.4 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 134
Chapter 7
Wireless LAN.........................................................................................................................139
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 139
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 139
7.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 140
7.3 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................... 142
7.4 The General Screen ......................................................................................................... 143
7.4.1 No Security ............................................................................................................... 145
7.4.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................... 146
7.4.3 WPA(2)-PSK ............................................................................................................ 147
7.4.4 WPA(2) Authentication ............................................................................................. 148
7.4.5 MAC Filter ........................................................................................................... 150
7.4.6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule ....................................................................... 151
7.5 The More AP Screen ........................................................................................................152
7.5.1 More AP Edit ............................................................................................................ 153
7.6 The WPS Screen .............................................................................................................. 153
7.7 The WPS Station Screen .................................................................................................. 155
7.8 The WDS Screen .............................................................................................................. 156
7.9 The Advanced Setup Screen ............................................................................................ 158
7.10 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 159
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................... 160
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms ...................................................................................... 161
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
12
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................... 161
7.10.4 WiFi Protected Setup ............................................................................................. 163
Chapter 8
Network Address Translation (NAT)....................................................................................171
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 171
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 171
8.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 171
8.3 The Port Forwarding Screen ............................................................................................. 172
8.3.1 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen ............................................................................ 175
8.4 The DMZ Host Screen ....................................................................................................... 176
8.5 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................... 177
8.6 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 178
Chapter 9
File Sharing ...........................................................................................................................181
9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 181
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter ............................................................................. 181
9.1.2 What You Need to Know About File-Sharing ........................................................... 182
9.1.3 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 183
9.2 The Server Settings Screen ............................................................................................. 183
9.2.1 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer ................................... 184
Chapter 10
Media Server..........................................................................................................................187
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 187
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter ........................................................................... 188
10.1.2 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 188
10.2 The Media Server Configuration Screen ........................................................................ 188
10.3 The Remove Disk Safely Screen .................................................................................... 189
Chapter 11
Firewall...................................................................................................................................191
11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 191
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 191
11.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 191
11.3 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................... 193
11.3.1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules ......................................................................... 194
11.4 The DoS Screen .............................................................................................................. 195
Chapter 12
Certificate ..............................................................................................................................197
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 197
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 13
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 197
12.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 197
12.3 The Local Certificates Screen ......................................................................................... 198
12.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................... 199
12.3.2 Import Certificate ................................................................................................... 200
12.3.3 Certificate Details .................................................................................................. 202
12.3.4 Load Signed Certificate .......................................................................................... 203
12.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................... 204
12.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................... 206
12.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................. 207
Chapter 13
Static Route ...........................................................................................................................209
13.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 209
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 209
13.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................. 210
13.2.1 Static Route Edit ....................................................................................................211
Chapter 14
Policy Forwarding.................................................................................................................213
14.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 213
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 213
14.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................. 213
14.2.1 Policy Forwarding Setup ...................................................................................... 214
Chapter 15
RIP..........................................................................................................................................217
15.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 217
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 217
15.2 The RIP Screen ............................................................................................................... 217
Chapter 16
Quality of Service (QoS).......................................................................................................219
16.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 219
16.1.1 QoS Overview ........................................................................................................ 220
16.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 220
16.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 220
16.3 The Quality of Service General Screen .......................................................................... 221
16.4 The Queue Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 222
16.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ............................................................................................ 224
16.5 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 225
16.5.1 QoS Class Edit ...................................................................................................... 227
16.6 The Policer Setup Screen ............................................................................................ 231
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
14
16.6.1 Policer Setup Edit ................................................................................................... 232
16.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................ 233
16.8 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 233
Chapter 17
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................237
17.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 237
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 237
17.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 237
17.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen .............................................................................................. 238
Chapter 18
Remote Management............................................................................................................239
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 239
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 239
18.2 The TR-069 Screen .........................................................................................................239
18.3 The TR-064 Screen .........................................................................................................241
18.4 The Service Control Screen ............................................................................................ 242
18.5 The IP Address Screen ................................................................................................... 243
18.5.1 Adding an IP Address ............................................................................................ 244
Chapter 19
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)..........................................................................................245
19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 245
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 245
19.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 245
19.3 The UPnP Screen ............................................................................................................ 246
19.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................. 247
19.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................. 250
Chapter 20
Parental Control....................................................................................................................257
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 257
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 257
20.2 The Time Restriction Screen ........................................................................................... 257
20.2.1 Adding a Schedule ................................................................................................. 258
20.3 The Content Filter Screen ............................................................................................... 259
20.3.1 Adding Filter Rule ................................................................................................... 260
Chapter 21
IGMP.......................................................................................................................................261
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 261
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 261
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 15
21.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 261
21.2 The IGMP Screen ............................................................................................................ 263
21.3 Interface Source Configuration ........................................................................................ 265
21.3.1 Add/Edit IGMP Source ........................................................................................... 266
Chapter 22
System Settings....................................................................................................................267
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 267
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 267
22.2 The General Screen ........................................................................................................267
22.3 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................ 269
Chapter 23
Logs ......................................................................................................................................271
23.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 271
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 271
23.2 The View Log Screen ...................................................................................................... 271
23.3 The Log Settings Screen ................................................................................................. 272
Chapter 24
Tools.......................................................................................................................................275
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 275
24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 275
24.2 The Firmware Screen ...................................................................................................... 276
24.3 The Configuration Screen ................................................................................................ 278
24.4 The Restart Screen ......................................................................................................... 280
Chapter 25
Diagnostic..............................................................................................................................283
25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 283
25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 283
25.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 283
25.3 The General Diagnostic Screen ...................................................................................... 284
25.4 The 802.1ag Screen ........................................................................................................285
25.5 The OAM Ping Test Screen ............................................................................................. 287
Chapter 26
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................289
26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 289
26.2 CellPipe 7130 RG Access and Login .............................................................................. 290
26.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 292
26.4 USB Device Connection .................................................................................................. 295
26.5 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 295
Table of Contents
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
16
Chapter 27
Product Specifications.........................................................................................................297
27.1 Hardware Specifications .................................................................................................. 297
27.2 Firmware Specifications ...................................................................................................298
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting ..................................................................................305
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address...........................................................321
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions......................................351
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting ...........................................................................361
Appendix E Wireless LANs ..................................................................................................373
Appendix F Common Services.............................................................................................389
Appendix G Legal Information..............................................................................................393
Index.......................................................................................................................................397
17
PART I
User’s Guide
18
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 19
CHAPTER 1
Introducing the CellPipe 7130
RG
1.1 Overview
The CellPipe 7130 RG is a wireless VDSL2+ router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway
with Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) capability. It has a DSL port for
super-fast Internet access over analog (POTS) telephone lines and a Giga Ethernet
port high-speed Internet access through cable. The CellPipe 7130 RG supports
bothPacket Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is
backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not
available.
Only use firmware for your CellPipe 7130 RG’s specific model.
Refer to the label on the bottom of your CellPipe 7130 RG.
The CellPipe 7130 RG has a a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick
or a USB hard drive. The CellPipe 7130 RG can also function as a media server to
let other users in the network open media files stored in the USB device.
See Chapter 27 on page 297 for a full list of features.
1.2 Ways to Manage the CellPipe 7130 RG
Use any of the following methods to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the
CellPipe 7130 RG using a (supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your
device.
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
20
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the CellPipe 7130
RG
Do the following things regularly to make the CellPipe 7130 RG more secure and
to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists
of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it).
Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes
unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the
CellPipe 7130 RG to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier
configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the CellPipe 7130
RG. You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.4 Applications for the CellPipe 7130 RG
Here are some example uses for which the CellPipe 7130 RG is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your CellPipe 7130 RG provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port
to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have up
to eight WAN services over one ADSL, VDSL or Ethernet WAN line. The CellPipe
7130 RG cannot work in ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN mode at the same time.
Note: The ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN lines share the same eight WAN Connect
(or layer-2) interfaces that you configure in the CellPipe 7130 RG. Refer to
Section 5.5 on page 105 for the WAN > Connect screen.
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 21
Computers can connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 CellPipe 7130 RG’s Internet Access Application
You can also configure IP filtering on the CellPipe 7130 RG for secure Internet
access. When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your
network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means
that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely
browse the Internet and download files.
ADSL / VDSL
WLAN
PPPoE
IPoE
Bridging
WAN
ADSL
IPoA / PPPoA
WAN
Ethernet
LAN
PPPoE
IPoE
WAN
DSL
LAN
Bridging
LAN
WLAN
WLAN
A
A
A
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
22
1.4.2 HomePNA
The CellPipe 7130 RG complies with HomePNA (Home Phoneline Networking
Alliance, also known as HPNA) 3.1, a home networking technology for carrying
data over existing coaxial cables and telephone wiring.
The figure below shows your CellPipe 7130 RG (A) connecting to a phone line
outlet for DSL Internet access and a coaxial outlet to relay Internet connectivity to
other coxial outlets in the building. The laptop (B) connects wirelessly to the
CellPipe 7130 RG. The set-up box (C) connects into a coaxial outlet in another part
of the house for access to online videos.
Figure 2 HomePNA Application
1.4.3 CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB Support
The USB port of the CellPipe 7130 RG is used for file-sharing and media server
features.
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 23
File Sharing
Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard
drive (B). You can connect one USB hard drive to the CellPipe 7130 RG at a time.
Figure 3 USB File Sharing Application
Media Server
You can also use the CellPipe 7130 RG as a media server. This lets anyone on your
network play video, music, and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the
CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB port (without having to copy them to another computer).
Figure 4 USB Media Server Application
B
A
B
A
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
24
1.5 Hardware Connections
Remove the CellPipe 7130 RG’s plastic cover before using it.
Figure 5 Hardware Connections
1Do one of the following for your Internet connection:
1a DSL: Use a telephone wire to connect this port to a telephone jack (or the
DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter, if you have one).
1b GigE: If you have a broadband router or modem already in your network, use
an Ethernet cable to connect this port to an Ethernet jack with Internet access.
2ETHERNET: Use an Ethernet cable to connect a computer to one of these ports
for initial configuration and/or Internet access.
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 25
Note: Use an 8-wire Ethernet cable for Gigabit connections. Using a 4-wire Ethernet
cable limits your connection to 100 Mbps. Note that the connection speed also
depends on what the Ethernet device at the other end can support.
3HPNA: Use a coaxial cable to connect to a coaxial outlet and relay Internet traffic
throughout your house through coaxial cabling.
4USB 2.0: Connect a USB (version 2.0 or lower) memory stick or a USB hard drive
for file sharing. The CellPipe 7130 RG automatically detects the USB device. Use
a USB extension cable if the stick is too big to fit.
5Use the power adaptor provided with your CellPipe 7130 RG to connect an
appropriate power source to this socket.
6Push the power button to the on position.
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
26
1.6 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
Figure 6 LEDs on the Device
None of the LEDs are on if the CellPipe 7130 RG is not receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED COLO
RSTATUS DESCRIPTION
INTERNET Green On The CellPipe 7130 RG has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or
assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was
successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection
is up.
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 27
Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections.
Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in
bridged mode.
DSL Green On The DSL line is up.
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is initializing the DSL line.
Off The DSL line is down.
WPS Green On The wireless connection is successful. The light turns on
for about 3 seconds before turning off.
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is connecting with other wireless
clients using WPS.
Off The WPS feature is not activated or has an error.
WLAN Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in IEEE
802.11b/g mode.
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is communicating with other
wireless clients.
Off The wireless network is not activated.
HPNA Green On The CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to an HPNA-equipped
device through the coaxial cable.
Blinking Data is transmitting over the HPNA cable.
Off No HPNA device is connected.
USB Green On The CellPipe 7130 RG recognizes a USB connection.
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending/receiving data to /from
the USB device connected to it.
Off The CellPipe 7130 RG does not detect a USB connection.
GigE Green On The Giga Ethernet connection is working.
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving data to/
from the Giga Ethernet link.
Off There is no Giga Ethernet link.
ETHERNET
1-4 Green On The CellPipe 7130 RG has a successful 100 Mbps
Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area
Network (LAN).
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving data to/
from the LAN at 100 Mbps.
Off The CellPipe 7130 RG does not have an Ethernet
connection with the LAN.
Power Green On The CellPipe 7130 RG is receiving power and ready for
use.
Blinking The CellPipe 7130 RG is self-testing.
Red On The CellPipe 7130 RG detected an error while self-
testing, or there is a device malfunction.
Off The CellPipe 7130 RG is not receiving power.
Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED COLO
RSTATUS DESCRIPTION
Chapter 1 Introducing the CellPipe 7130 RG
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
28
1.7 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need
to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default
configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had
previously and the password will be reset to “telus”.
1Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for
ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the
POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device
restarts.
1.8 The WLAN Button
You can use the WLAN button of the device to turn the wireless LAN off or on.
1Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2Press the WLAN button for one second and release it. The WLAN LED should
change from on to off or vice versa. Refer to Section 7.4 on page 143 for more
information.
1.9 The WPS Button
You can use the WPS button to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless
network with strong security.
1Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2Make sure the wireless LAN is turned on. Refer to Section 1.8 on page 28 and
Section 7.4 on page 143 for information or check that the WLAN LED is on.
3Press the WPS button for more than one second and release it. Press the WPS
button on another WPS -enabled device within range of the CellPipe 7130 RG. The
WPS LED should flash while the CellPipe 7130 RG sets up a WPS connection with
the wireless device. Refer to Section 7.6 on page 153 for more information.
You must activate WPS in the CellPipe 7130 RG and in another wireless device within
two minutes of each other. See Section 7.10.4 on page 163 for more information.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 29
CHAPTER 2
Tutorials
2.1 Overview
This chapter describes:
•How to Set up a Wireless Network on page 29.
•HomePNA Example Setup on page 39
•How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs on page 40.
•How to Allow Out-of-band Remote Management from the WAN on page 53.
•Using the Media Server Feature on page 65
•Using the File Sharing Feature on page 71.
•Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding on page 72..
•Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network on page 74
•Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup on page 77
•Access the CellPipe 7130 RG Using DDNS on page 80
Note: The tutorials featured in this chapter require a basic understanding of
connecting to and using the Web Configurator on your CellPipe 7130 RG. For
details, see the included Quick Start Guide. For field descriptions of individual
screens, see the related technical reference in this User's Guide.
2.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network
This tutorial gives you examples of how to set up an access point (AP) and
wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters. The
wireless clients can access the Internet through an AP wirelessly.
The CellPipe 7130 RG’s AP function is enabled by default. The wireless settings,
such as the SSID and pre-shared key, are already configured in the CellPipe 7130
RG. Use this tutorial if you want to use wireless settings other than the default
values.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
30
2.2.1 Example Parameters
An access point or wireless router is referred to as “AP” and a computer with a
wireless network card or USB/PCI adapter is referred to as “wireless client” here.
We use the CellPipe 7130 RG web screens and M-302 utility screens as an
example. The screens may vary slightly for different models.
2.2.2 Configuring the AP
Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP.
1Open the Network > Wireless LAN screen in the AP’s web configurator.
Network > Wireless LAN
SSID SSID_Example3
Security WPA-PSK
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey)
802.11 mode IEEE 802.11b/g/n Mixed
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 31
2Make sure the Active Wireless LAN check box is selected.
3Uncheck Auto Generate Key. This lets you enter an SSID and pre-shared key.
4Enter “SSID_Example3” as the SSID and select Auto to have the CellPipe 7130
RG automatically determine a channel which is not used by another AP.
5Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey” in
the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply.
6Click the Advanced Setup tab and make sure 802.11b/g/n Mixed is selected in
the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply.
Wireless LA N > Advanced Setup
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
32
7Open the Status screen.Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under
Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface
Status.
Status
8Click the WLAN Station List hyperlink in the AP’s Status screen. You can see if
any wireless client has connected to the AP.
Figure 7 Status: WLAN Station List
2.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client
This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 33
2.2.3.1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN
The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using a wireless
utility, as in the following diagram. The wireless client is labeled C and the access
point is labeled AP.
There are three ways to connect the client to an access point.
• Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and
connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured.
• Manually connect to a network.
• Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific
network or peer computer.
This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access
point (AP) which is configured for WPA-PSK security and connected to the
Internet. Before you connect to the access point, you must know its Service Set
IDentity (SSID) and WPA-PSK pre-shared key. In this example, the SSID is
“SSID_Example3” and the pre-shared key is “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”.
After you install the wireless utility and then insert the wireless client, follow the
steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen.
1Open the wireless utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown
next.
Utility: Site Survey
CAP
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
34
2The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks. Click
Scan if you want to search again. If no entry displays in the Available Network
List, that means there is no wireless network available within range. Make sure
the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP
or peer computer.
3When you try to connect to an AP with security configured, a window will pop up
prompting you to specify the security settings. Enter the pre-shared key and leave
the encryption type at the default setting.
Use the Next button to move on to the next screen. You can use the Back button
at any time to return to the previous screen, or the Exit button to return to the
Site Survey screen.
Utility: Security Settings
4The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to
continue.
Utility: Confirm Save
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 35
5The wireless utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the
wireless network using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the
wireless utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen
displays details of the active connection. Check the network information in the
Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected
network. If the wireless client is not connected to a network, the fields in this
screen remain blank.
Utility: Link Info
6Open your Internet browser and enter the URL of any other web site in the
address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is
successfully configured.
If you cannot access the web site, try changing the encryption type in the
Security Settings screen, check the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide
or contact your network administrator.
2.2.3.2 Creating and Using a Profile
A profile lets you automatically connect to the same wireless network every time
you use the wireless client. You can also configure different profiles for different
networks, for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at
home and at work.
This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to
an access point configured for WPA-PSK security. In this example, the SSID is
“SSID_Example3”, the profile name is “PN_Example3” and the pre-shared key is
“ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”. You have chosen the profile name
“PN_Example3”.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
36
1Open the wireless utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next.
Click Add to configure a new profile.
Utility: Profile
2The Add New Profile screen appears. The wireless client automatically searches
for available wireless networks, which are displayed in the Scan Info box. Click
on Scan if you want to search again. You can also configure your profile for a
wireless network that is not in the list.
Utility: Add New Profile
3Give the profile a descriptive name (of up to 32 printable ASCII characters). Select
Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP's SSID in the Scan
Info table and click Select.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 37
4Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect (In
this example, WPA-PSK).
Utility: Profile Security
5This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the
previous screen. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the
default setting.
Utility: Profile Encryption
6In the next screen, leave both boxes checked.
Profile: Wireless Protocol Settings.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
38
7Verify the profile settings in the read-only screen. Click Save to save and go to the
next screen.
Profile: Confirm Save
8Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately. Otherwise, click the
Activate Later button.
If you clicked Activate Later, you can select the profile from the list in the Profile
screen and click Connect to activate it.
Note: Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time.
Profile: Activate
9When you activate the new profile, the wireless utility returns to the Link Info
screen while it connects to the AP using your settings. When the wireless link is
established, the wireless utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link
Info screen displays details of the active connection.
10 Open your Internet browser, enter the URL of any other web site in the address
bar and press ENTER. If you are able to access the web site, your new profile is
successfully configured.
11 If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen, select the profile
you are using and click Edit. Check the details you entered previously. Also, refer
to the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network
administrator if necessary.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 39
2.3 HomePNA Example Setup
This tutorial shows you how you can use the CellPipe 7130 RG’s HomePNA feature
to connect a television in another part of the house to the Internet through the
coaxial port. You will need:
•a Set-Top Box (STB)
• HomePNA Ethernet Bridge
•a television; and
• an active Video On Demand (VOD)/Internet Protocol Television (IPTV)
subscription
The figure below shows the hardware setup for this tutorial:
1Connect your CellPipe 7130 RG to the Internet source. This could be either DSL or
Ethernet.
2Connect the CellPipe 7130 RG’s coaxial port a coaxial outlet in your house. This
relays Internet connectivity to other coaxial outlets in other parts of the house.
3In the room where your television is located, connect the HomePNA bridge to a
coaxial outlet.
1
2
3
4
5
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
40
4Using an Ethernet cable, connect the HomePNA bridge device to the STB. This
grants Internet access to the STB.
5Refer to the user’s guide of your STB for information on how to connect it to your
television, as well as configure your account settings on it.
You should now be able to watch online videos in your television using your VOD
or IPTV subscription.
2.4 How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs
The CellPipe 7130 RG allows you to have more than one PVC using the ATM layer-
2 interface. You can apply different ATM QoS settings to traffic through different
PVCs. In this example, real-time or video service, such as using a webcam to send
photos or uploading media content to share videos and images on a blog, comes
from IP address 192.168.1.33 and is forwarded out through PVC 1 (0/33). Non-
time sensitive data transfers, such as e-mail or FTP, come from IP address
192.168.1.34 and are forwarded out through PVC 2 (0/34). The maximum
upstream transmission speed of your ADSL port is 1 Mbps. You want to give the
real-time traffic fixed bandwidth 400 Kbps and higher priority over the general
data transmission which shares the bandwidth 600 Kbps. You allot more
bandwidth to data transmission since there are more volume of this traffic than
real-time traffic.
Note: To apply different QoS priorities to different applications over a PVC, use the
Advanced > QoS screens. The packet-level QoS feature is not applicable to a
PVC with CBR or Realtime VBR enabled.
Overview of what you have to do
1Create PVCs using the Network > WAN screens. See Figure 2.4.1 on page 41.
2Create policy forwarding rules in the Advanced > Policy Forwarding screen to
map specific IP addresses to the PVCs you created. See Figure 2.4.2 on page 51.
Table 2 ATM QoS and Group Settings
TRAFFIC TYPE LAN PVC ATM QOS BANDWIDTH GROUP
Real-time or
video service 192.168.1.33 atm0 (0/33) CBR 400 Kbps GR1/
PVC1
Non-time
sensitive data 192.168.1.34 atm1 (0/34) Non Realtime
VBR 600 Kbps GR2/
PVC2
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 41
2.4.1 Configuring PVCs
Follows the steps below to set up two PVCs on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
1Click Network > WAN > Connect.
2Select ATM from the Interface drop-down list and click Add.
Table 3 Multiple PVC Settings
PVC INTERFACE NAME WAN SERVICE
0/33 ppp0 PPPoE (pppoe_0_0_33)
0/34 atm1 IPoE (ipoe_0_0_34)
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
42
3Enter the VPI and VCI values (0 and 33 in this example) for PVC 1.
Select CBR in the Service Category field and set the Peak Cell Rate as 943
(divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424). Click Apply to save the changes and
go back to the Connect screen.
4Click Add to configure another PVC.
5Enter the VPI and VCI values (0 and 34 in this example) for PVC 2.
Select Non Realtime VBR in the Service Category field. Set the Peak Cell
Rate as 1415 (divide the bandwidth 600000 bps by 424) and set both the
Sustainable Cell Rate and Maximum Burst Size as 1414 (which is less than
the peak cell rate).
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 43
6Click Apply to save the changes and go back to the Connect screen.
2.4.1.1 Internet Connection Settings for PVC 1
1Click Network > WAN > Servicesto configure WAN connection settings for PVC
1. Click Add.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
44
2Select PVC 1 (atm0/0_0_33) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next.
3Select PPP over Ethernet and click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 45
4Enter the user name (user@isp.net for example), password (qwert12345 for
example) and service name (isp.net for example) for the PPP connection. Click
Next.
5Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces
list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp0 in this example) to the Selected
Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway.
Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
46
6Select the first option. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS
Server Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp0 in this example)
to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system
DNS server. Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 47
7The summary screen displays. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go
back to the Services screen.
2.4.1.2 Internet Connection Settings for PVC 2
1Click Add in the WAN > Services screen to configure WAN connection settings
for PVC 2.
2Select PVC 2 (atm2/0_0_34) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
48
3Select IP over Ethernet and click Next.
4Select Obtain an IP address automatically and click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 49
5Select Enable NAT and click Next.
6Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces
list. Select and move a WAN interface (atm1 in this example) to the Selected
Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway.
Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
50
7Select the first option. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS
Server Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (atm1 in this example)
to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system
DNS server. Click Next.
8The summary screen displays. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go
back to the Services screen.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 51
9The Services screen should look like the following.
2.4.2 Setting Policy Forwarding
You can use policy forwarding to map traffic to a specific PVC, but you need to
enter the source IP address, port number and/or MAC address of each packet that
passes through the PVC. See Chapter 14 on page 213 for more information.
Follow the steps below to map traffic from IP address 192.168.1.33 to PVC 1 and
traffic from IP address 192.168.1.34 to PVC 2.
1Click Advanced > Policy Forwarding to open the following screen. Click Add to
create a new policy forwarding group GR1.
Table 4 DSL Connection Groups
GROUP LAN IP ADDRESS PORT MAC ADDRESS WAN INTERFACE
GR1 192.168.1.33 80 (HTTP) AA:BB:AA:BB:AA:BB ppp0 (0/33)
GR2 192.168.1.34 21 (FTP)
25 (E-mail)
FF:CC:FF:CC:FF:CC atm2 (0/34)
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
52
2Enter GR1 as the Policy Name. In this group, we will associate ppp0 (PVC 1) as
the WAN interface with 192.168.1.33 as the IP address. Select pppoe_0_0_33/
ppp0 from the WAN Interface list. Enter 192.168.1.33 as the Source IP
Address. Select the protocol and enter the source port, as well as the source MAC
address. Click Apply to finish the settings and go back to the Policy Forwarding
screen.
3GR1 has been added successfully to the interface group list. Click Add to create
another interface group: GR2.
4Enter GR2 as the Policy Name. In this group, we will associate atm1 (PVC 2) as
the WAN interface with 192.168.1.34 as the IP address. Select ipoe_0_0_34/
atm1 from the WAN Interface list. Enter 192.168.1.34 as the Source IP
Address. Again, select the protocol and enter the source port, as well as the
source MAC address. Click Apply to finish the settings and go back to the Policy
Forwarding screen.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 53
5GR2 has been added successfully to the interface group list. Continue to add
groups to associate other services with PVCs. The screen should look like the
following.
2.5 How to Allow Out-of-band Remote
Management from the WAN
This tutorial shows you how to set up a dedicated WAN connection for ISP
management of the CellPipe 7130 RG and prevent the clients on the LAN from
configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG. You set up two DSL connections with different
VLAN IDs and priorities to separate clients traffic from management traffic. The
DSL connection for remote management has the highest priority.
Table 5 Multiple VDSL Connection Settings
WAN INTERFACE DESCRIPTION CONNECTION METHOD VLAN ID PRIORITY
ppp0.200 Internet PPPoE 200 2
ptm0.300 RemoteMgmt IPoE 300 7
VID 200
VID 300
VID 200 ISP
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
54
2.5.1 Configuring Multiple WAN Connections
Follow the steps below to configure two VDSL connections.
1Make sure you set the WAN Link Mode to DSL in the Network > WAN > Mode
screen.
2By default, there is a PTM layer-2 interface in VLAN MUX mode configured already
on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
DSL Connection for Internet Access
1Go to the WAN > Services screen. Click Add.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 55
2Select ptm0/(0_0_1) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next.
3Select PPP over Ethernet, enter a descriptive service name (Internet in this
example), and set the priority level to 2 and VLAN ID to 200. Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
56
4Enter the user name (user@isp.net for example), password (qwert12345 for
example) and service name (isp.net for example) for the PPP connection. Click
Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 57
5Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces
list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp1.200 in this example) to the
Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default
gateway. Click Next.
6Select the first option. Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS
Server Interfaces list. Select and move a WAN interface (ppp1.200 in this
example) to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as
the system DNS server. Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
58
7The summary screen displays. The VLAN ID is appended to the service name you
specified automatically. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go back to
the Internet Connection screen.
DSL Connection for Remote Management
1Go to the WAN > Services screen. Click Add.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 59
2Select ptm0/(0_0_1) as the layer-2 interface. Click Next.
3Select IP over Ethernet, enter a descriptive service name (RemoteMgmt in this
example), and set the priority level to 7 and VLAN ID to 300. Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
60
4Select Obtain an IP address automatically and click Next.
5Make sure Enable NAT is not selected and click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 61
6Keep the WAN interface (ptm0.300 in this example) in the Available Routed
WAN Interfaces list to not have the clients use this interface as the default
gateway. Click Next.
7Select the first option. Keep the WAN interface (ptm0.300 in this example) in the
Available WAN Interfaces list to not have the clients use this interface as the
system DNS server. Click Next.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
62
8The summary screen displays. Click Apply/Save to save your changes and go
back to the Services screen. The VLAN ID is appended to the service name you
specified automatically.
9The Internet Connection screen should look like the following.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 63
DSL Connections Status
1Go to the Status screen. Check and write down the WAN IP addresses assigned
by your ISP for the WAN connections in PTM mode you configured (1 and 2 in this
example). Your DSL interface status should also be Up and display the
transmission rates.
2Click the WAN Service Statistics link under More Status in the Status screen.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
64
3The WAN Service Ststistics screen displays. Check if any packets are
transmitted or received through the two WAN connections you just configured.
2.5.2 Configuring Remote Management
Follow the steps below to not allow access to the CellPipe 7130 RG from the LAN.
1Click Advanced > Remote MGNT > Service Control.
2Select the Enable option, and deselect all service options in the LAN column.
Click Apply.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 65
2.5.3 Testing the Connection
After you finish all the settings in this tutorial, you would not be able to access the
web configurator from the LAN anymore. Check if you can use the WAN IP address
for the RemoteMgmt WAN connection to access the CellPipe 7130 RG. You should
also be able to access the Internet using the computer which is connected to the
CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN port.
2.6 Using the Media Server Feature
Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television
using a Digital Media Adapter (DMA).
This section shows you how the media server feature works using the following
media clients:
• Microsoft (MS) Windows Media Player
Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7. Make sure your
computer is able to play media files (music, videos and pictures).
•A DMA
You need to set up the DMA to work with your television (TV). Refer to your
DMA’s Quick Start Guide for the correct hardware connections.
Before you begin, connect the USB storage device containing the media files you
want to play to the USB port of your CellPipe 7130 RG.
2.6.1 Configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG
Note: The Media Server feature is enabled by default.
To use your CellPipe 7130 RG as a media server, click USB Services > Media
Server.
Tutorial: USB Services > Media Server
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
66
Check Enable Media Server and click Apply. This enables DLNA-compliant
media clients to play the video, music and image files in your USB storage device.
2.6.2 Using Windows Media Player
This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device
connected to your CellPipe 7130 RG using Windows Media Player.
Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using Windows Media Player)
Windows Vista
1Open Windows Media Player and click Library > Media Sharing as follows.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista
Computer with
USB Storage Device
Windows Media Player
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 67
2Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (2)
3In the Library screen, check the left panel. The Windows Media Player should
detect the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (3)
The CellPipe 7130 RG displays as a playlist. Clicking on the category icons in the
right panel shows you the media files in the USB storage device attached to your
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
68
Windows 7
1Open Windows Media Player. It should automatically detect the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (1)
If you cannot see the CellPipe 7130 RG in the left panel as shown above, right-
click Other Libraries > Refresh Other Libraries.
2Select a category in the left panel and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to
the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2)
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 69
3In the right panel, you should see a list of files available in the USB storage device.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2)
2.6.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter
This section shows you how you can use the CellPipe 7130 RG with a DMA to play
media files stored in the USB storge device in your TV screen.
Note: For this tutorial, your DMA should already be set up with the TV according to the
instructions in the DMA’s Quick Start Guide.
1Connect the DMA to an available LAN port in your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using DMA)
DMA-2500
USB Storage Device
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
70
2Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA’s Home (or similar) screen to appear. Using
the remote control, go to MyMedia (or similar) to open the following screen.
Select the CellPipe 7130 RG as your media server.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500
3The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device.
Select the file you want to open and push the Play button in the remote control.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 (2)
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 71
2.7 Using the File Sharing Feature
In this section you can:
• Set up file sharing
• Access the shared files from a computer
2.7.1 Set Up File Sharing
To set up file sharing, you need to enable file sharing on your CellPipe 7130 RG.
This shares the files in your USB device to other users in the local network.
Go to USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration to enable file
sharing and enter a workgroup name. Click Apply to save your settings.
Tutorial: USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration
This sets up the file sharing server.
Tutorial: USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration (2)
2.7.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer
You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Note: The examples in this User’s Guide show you how to use Microsoft’s Windows
XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating system’s
documentation for how to browse your file structure.
Open Windows Explorer to access Bob’s Share using Windows Explorer browser.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
72
1In Windows Explorer’s Address bar type a double backslash “\\” followed by the IP
address of the CellPipe 7130 RG (the default IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG is
192.168.1.1) and press [ENTER]. A screen asking for password authentication
appears. Type the user name and password and click OK.
File Shari ng via Windows Expl orer
Once you log in to the shared folder via your CellPipe 7130 RG, you do not have to
re-log in unless you restart your computer.
2.8 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding
Thomas manages the Doom server on a computer behind the CellPipe 7130 RG. In
order for players on the Internet (like A in the figure below) to communicate with
the Doom server, Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on
the CellPipe 7130 RG. Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom
server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34. Additionally, players
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 73
are only allowed to access the Doom server on Friday to Saturday, from 1PM to
8PM.
Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup
Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom
server computer (see Section 8.3 on page 172 for more information).
1Click Network > NAT to open the Port Forwarding screen. Enter the following
values:
D=192.168.1.34 WAN
LAN
port 666
A
Service Name Select User Defined.
In the screen that opens, enter Doom_Server as the Service
Name.
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is
forwarded. This is the default interface for this example, which is
ipoe_eth4_1.
Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the Doom server. This is 192.168.1.34
for this example.
External Port/s Enter 666 as the Start and End port.
Protocol Select TCP/UDP. This should be the protocol supported by the
Doom server.
Start/Stop Time
Select Days
Enter 13:00 ~ 20:00 in the time fields and select Friday ~
Saturday in the day field.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
74
2The screen should display as follows. Click Add.
3The port forwarding settings you configured should appear in the table. Click
Apply to have the CellPipe 7130 RG start forwarding port 666 traffic to the
computer with IP address 192.168.1.34.
Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas’ Doom server.
2.9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to
Another Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may
connect a router to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN. The router may be used to
separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static
routing rule for two network routings.
In the following figure, router R is connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN. R
connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If
you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 75
network), the traffic is sent to the CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN default gateway by
default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
You need to specify a static routing rule on the CellPipe 7130 RG to specify R as
the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the CellPipe 7130 RG
routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B.This tutorial uses the
following example IP settings:
Table 6 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
The CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN 172.16.1.1
The CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN 192.168.1.1
A192.168.1.34
R’s N1 192.168.1.253
N2
B
N1
A
R
N2
B
N1
A
R
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
76
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1Click Advanced > Static Route. Click Add.
2Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
• Select Active.
•Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2.
• Select the Internet connection interface for this route, ipoe_0_0_33/atm0 in
this example.
•Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field.
Click Apply. The Advanced > Static Route screen should display the route you
just added.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally
configure B’s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
R’s N2 192.168.10.2
B192.168.10.33
Table 6 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 77
2.10 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup
This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to
prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to
clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-
mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the
Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other
branch offices.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission
bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-
mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the
following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (7) to e-mail traffic from
the LAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is
network congestion.
• Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address
(AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7.
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the
internal QoS mapping table on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
QoS Exampl e
10,000 kbps
DSL
Your computer
IP=192.168.1.23
A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
and/or
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
Email traffic: Highest priority
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
78
1Click Advanced > QoS > General and check Active. Set your WAN Managed
Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the CellPipe
7130 RG automatically determine this figure).
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
2Go to Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup. Click Add to create a new queue. In
the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values:
•Name: E-mail
•Priority: 4 (High)
•Weight: 8
•Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps)
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 79
3Go to Advanced > QoS > Class Setup. Click Add to create a new class. Check
Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in
this example.
To Queue Link this to an item in the Advanced > QoS >
Queue Setup screen, which is the E-mail queue
created in this example.
From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be
coming from. Select LAN1.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
80
This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you
have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps
your computer’s IP address and MAC address to the E-mail queue (see the
Source fields).
4Verify that the queue setup works by checking Advanced > QoS > Monitor. This
shows the bandwidth alloted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Monitor
2.11 Access the CellPipe 7130 RG Using DDNS
If you connect your CellPipe 7130 RG to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN
IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The
CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
allows you to access the CellPipe 7130 RG using a domain name.
Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP
address or MAC address.
MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer -
AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you
know it.
IP Address Type the IP address of your computer -
192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you
know it.
w.x.y.z a.b.c.d
http://yourrouter.dyndns.org
A
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 81
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial shows you how to:
•Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
•Configuring DDNS on Your CellPipe 7130 RG
•Testing the DDNS Setting
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
2.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
1Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
2Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the
username and password.
3Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
4Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an
example.
• Hostname: yourrouter.dyndns.org
•Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your CellPipe 7130 RG is currently
using. You can find the IP address on the CellPipe 7130 RG’s Web Configurator
Home page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the CellPipe
7130 RG later.
2.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your CellPipe 7130 RG
Configure the following settings in the Advanced > Dynamic DNS screen.
• Select Active Dynamic DNS.
• Select Dynamic DNS for the DDNS type.
•Type yourrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
82
• Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
Click Apply.
2.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting
Now you should be able to access the CellPipe 7130 RG from the Internet. To test
this:
1Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is
connected to the Internet.
2Type http://yourrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
3The CellPipe 7130 RG’s login page should appear. You can then log into the
CellPipe 7130 RG and manage it.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 83
CHAPTER 3
Introducing the Web
Configurator
3.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy
device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and
later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled
by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See Appendix C on page 351 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed
in Internet Explorer.
3.2 User Levels
There are three (3) user levels for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG. The accounts
have different access rights as follows :
•Subscriber - the default user name is admin and the password is telus. You
can change the user name and password for this account. You can also change
all the Web Configurator screens using this account.
•Privileged - the default user name is root and the password is telus. You can
change the user name and password for this account. You cannot access the
Advanced > Remote MGMT > Service Control screen but you can still use
the SSH service. You can also modify the rest of the Web Configurator screens.
•Installer - the default user name is tech and the password is telus. You cannot
change the user name or password for this account. The Web Configurator is
read-only so you also cannot modify any of the screens using this account. In
addition, this account cannot view the following screens:
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
84
Advanced > Remote MGNT > Service Control
Network > WLAN > WPS Station
Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
Maintenance > Tools > Configuration
Maintenance > Tools > Restart
This account has no access to files shared through the USB Services screens.
Note: The CellPipe 7130 RG supports multiple remote management sessions running
at one time.
3.2.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
1Make sure your CellPipe 7130 RG hardware is properly connected (refer to the
Quick Start Guide).
2Launch your web browser.
3Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the URL.
4A password screen displays. Enter the default administrator user name admin and
default administrator password telus. The password displays in non-readable
characters. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click OK.
Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field.
Figure 8 Password Screen
Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has
its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 85
3.3 Web Configurator Main Screen
Figure 9 Home
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
•A - title bar
•B - navigation panel
•C - main window
•D - status bar
A
B
C
D
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
86
3.3.1 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure CellPipe
7130 RG features. The following tables describe each menu item.
Table 7 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Home This screen shows the CellPipe 7130 RG’s general device and
network status information. Use this screen to access the
statistics and client list.
Network
WAN Mode Use this screen to choose between DSL and Ethernet for your
Internet connection.
Connect Use this screen to add or remove a DSL PTM (Packet Transfer
Mode) interface.
Services Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address
assignment, and other advanced properties.
LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP, DHCP and IP alias
settings.
Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings, WLAN
authentication/security settings and MAC filtering rules.
More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the CellPipe 7130
RG.
WPS Use this screen to enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) and view
the WPS status.
WPS Station Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network.
WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System links to
other access points.
Advanced
Setup Use this screen to configure the advanced wireless LAN settings.
NAT Port
Forwarding The NAT screens are available only when you enable NAT in a
WAN connection.
Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside
world.
DMZ Host Use this screen to configure a default server which receives
packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding
screen.
ALG Use this screen to allow SIP sessions to pass through the CellPipe
7130 RG.
USB Services
File Sharing Share
Configuration Use this screen to enable file sharing via the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Media Server Media Server
Configuration Use this screen to enable the media server on the CellPipe
7130 RG.
Remove Disk
Safely Use this screen to safely disconnect the USB device from the
CellPipe 7130 RG
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 87
Security
Firewall Incoming This screen shows a summary of the IP filtering rules, and allows
you to add or remove an incoming IP filtering rule that allows
incoming traffic from the WAN.
DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of
Service (DoS) attacks.
Certificate Local
Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage
certificates and certification requests.
Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
Advanced
Static Route IP Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device
about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes.
Policy
Forwarding Use this screen to configure policy routing on the CellPipe 7130
RG.
RIP Use this screen to configure RIP (Routing Information Protocol)
settings.
QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS.
Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier.
Policer Setup Use this screen to specify the committed rate and committed
burst size for incoming packets.
Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics.
Dynamic DNS This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a
dynamic IP address.
Remote
MGMT TR069 Use this screen to configure the CellPipe 7130 RG to be managed
by an ACS (Auto Configuration Server).
TR064 Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.
ServiceControl Use this screen to configure which services/protocols can access
which CellPipe 7130 RG interface.
IPAddress Use this screen to configure from which IP address(es) users can
manage the CellPipe 7130 RG.
UPnP General Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off.
Parental
Control Time
Restriction Use this screen to configure the days and times when the
restrictions are enforced.
Content Filter Use this screen to prevent users of your netowrk from viewing
inappropriate web content.
IGMP IGMP Use this screen to select the IGMP version to use as well as
configure the settings for IGMP.
IGMP Source
Configuration Use this screen to set the server where the CellPipe 7130 RG
gets the multicast group information
Maintenance
Table 7 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
88
3.3.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in
the rest of this document.
Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 91
for more information about the Status screen.
3.3.3 Status Bar
Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration
has been updated.
System General Use this screen to configure your device’s name, domain name,
management inactivity timeout and password.
Time Setting Use this screen to change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s time and date.
Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected.
Log Settings Use this screen to change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s log settings.
Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Restart This screen allows you to reboot the CellPipe 7130 RG without
turning the power off.
Diagnostic General Use this screen to test the connections to other devices.
802.1ag Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault
Management) MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance
association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports.
OAM Ping Test These screen displays information to help you identify problems
with the DSL connection.
Table 7 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
89
PART II
Technical Reference
90
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 91
CHAPTER 4
Status Screens
4.1 Overview
Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system
resources and interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN). The Status screen also provides
detailed information from DHCP and statistics from traffic.
4.2 Status Screen
Click Home to open this screen.
Figure 10 Status Screen
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
92
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 8 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to update this screen.
Apply Click this to update this screen immediately.
Device
Information
User Name This field displays the CellPipe 7130 RG system name. It is used for
identification. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.
Model
Number This is the model name of your device.
MAC
Address This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to
your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Firmware
Version This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device.
It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Click this to go
to the screen where you can change it.
DSL
Firmware
Version
This field displays the current version of the device’s DSL modem code.
WAN
Information Information displays for each WAN interface you add to the CellPipe
7130 RG.
Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP.
IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG in the
WAN.
IP Subnet
Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
LAN
Information
IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG in the
LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.
IP Subnet
Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN.
DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the CellPipe 7130 RG is providing
to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The CellPipe 7130 RG is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns
IP addresses to other computers in the LAN.
Relay - The CellPipe 7130 RG acts as a surrogate DHCP server and
relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and
the clients.
None - The CellPipe 7130 RG is not providing any DHCP services to the
LAN.
Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.
WLAN
Information
Channel This is the channel number used by the CellPipe 7130 RG now.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 93
WPS Status This field displays the status of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). Click this
to go to the screen where you can change it.
WDS Status This field displays
•AP when WDS is disabled.
•Bridge when the CellPipe 7130 RG functions as a wireless network
bridge only to use WDS (Wireless Distribution System) to establish
wireless links with other APs.
•AP+Bridge when WDS is enabled and the CellPipe 7130 RG acts as
a bridge and access point simultaneously.
Click this to go to the screen where you can change it
AP Information Information displays for each AP profile you activate on the CellPipe
7130 RG.
ESSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the CellPipe 7130 RG in
this wireless network. Click this to go to the screen where you can
change it.
Status This shows the current status of the wireless network.
Security This shows the level of wireless security the CellPipe 7130 RG is using in
this wireless network.
System Status
System
Uptime This field displays how long the CellPipe 7130 RG has been running
since it last started up. The CellPipe 7130 RG starts up when you plug it
in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Tools > Restart), or when
you reset it (see Section 1.7 on page 28).
Current
Date/Time This field displays the current date and time in the CellPipe 7130 RG.
You can change this in Maintenance > System > Time Setting.
System
Mode This displays whether the CellPipe 7130 RG is functioning as a router or
a bridge.
CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s processing
ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the
CellPipe 7130 RG is running at full load, and the throughput is not going
to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more
throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using
QoS; see Chapter 16 on page 219).
Memory
Usage This field displays what percentage of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s memory is
currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If
memory usage does get close to 100%, the CellPipe 7130 RG is
probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See
Section 24.4 on page 280, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for
a few seconds.
Interface Status
Interface This column displays each interface the CellPipe 7130 RG has.
Table 8 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
94
4.2.1 WAN Service Statistics
Click Status > WAN Service Statistics to access this screen. Use this screen to
view the WAN statistics.
Figure 11 Status > WAN Service Statistics
Status This field indicates whether or not the CellPipe 7130 RG is using the
interface.
For the DSL interface, this field displays LinkDown (line is down) or Up
(line is up or connected).
For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this field displays Up when the
CellPipe 7130 RG is using the interface and NoLink when the line is
disconnected.
For the WLAN interface, it displays Up when WLAN is enabled or
Disabled when WLAN is not active.
Rate For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream
transmission rate.
For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this displays the port speed and
duplex setting.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate.
More Status
WAN Service
Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics of the WAN
connection(s). See Section 4.2.1 on page 94.
Route Info Click this link to view the internal routing table on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
See Section 4.2.2 on page 96.
WLAN
Station List Click this link to display the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations
that are currently associating with the CellPipe 7130 RG. See Section
4.2.3 on page 97.
LAN
Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics on the LAN and WLAN
interfaces. See Section 4.2.4 on page 98.
Client List Click this link to view current DHCP client information. See Section
4.2.5 on page 99.
Table 8 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 95
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 Status > WAN Service Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface used by this connection.
A default name ipoa0, pppoa1, atmx (where x starts from 0 and is the
index number of ATM layer-2 interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI
values) or ptm0 indicates the DSL port. The pppx name (where x starts
from 0 and is the index number of PPP connection on the CellPipe 7130
RG) indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN interface. eth4
indicates the Ethernet WAN interface (the physical Ethernet WAN port).
The number after the dot (.) represents the VLAN ID number assigned to
traffic sent through this connection. The number after the underscore
(_) represents the index number of connections through the same
interface.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Description This shows the descriptive name of this connection.
0 and 35 or 0 and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers. The last
number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC
or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Received
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Transmitted
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Close Click this to close the window.
Refresh
Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the
Refresh Interval field.
Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
96
4.2.2 Route Info
Routing is based on the destination address only and the CellPipe 7130 RG takes
the shortest path to forward a packet. Click Status > Route Info to access this
screen. Use this screen to view the internal routing table on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 12 Status > Route Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Status > Route Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Destination This indicates the destination IP address of this route.
Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route’s
traffic.
Subnet
Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route.
Flag This indicates the route status.
Up: The route is up.
!(Reject): The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail.
Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic.
Host: The target of the route is a host.
Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing.
Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon
or redirect
Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or
rederict.
Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the
best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The
smaller the number, the lower the "cost".
Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 97
4.2.3 WLAN Station List
Click Status > WLAN Station List to access this screen. Use this screen to view
the wireless stations that are currently associated to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 13 Status > WLAN Station List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is
forwarded.
•br0 indicates the LAN interface.
•ptm0 indicates the VDSL WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.
•atmx (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer-2
interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI values) indicates the ADSL
WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.
•pppoa1 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using PPPoA.
•ipoa0 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using IPoA.
•ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE.
•eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface using IPoE.
Close Click this to close the window.
Table 10 Status > Route Info (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 11 Status > WLAN Station List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC This field shows the MAC (Media Access Control) address of an associated
wireless station.
SSID This field shows the SSID to which the wireless station is connected.
Interface This field shows the wireless interface to which the wireless station is
connected.
Close Click this to close the window.
Refresh
Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh
Interval field.
Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
98
4.2.4 LAN Statistics
Click Status > LAN Statistics to access this screen. Use this screen to view the
LAN statistics.
Figure 14 Status > LAN Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Status > LAN Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Received
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Transmitted
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Close Click this to close the window.
Refresh
Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the
Refresh Interval field.
Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 99
4.2.5 Client List
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows
individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can
configure the CellPipe 7130 RG as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as
a server, the CellPipe 7130 RG provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If
DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or
else the computer must be manually configured.
Click Status > Client List to open the following screen. The read-only DHCP table
shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and
MAC Address) of all network clients using the CellPipe 7130 RG’s DHCP server.
Figure 15 Status > Client List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Status > Client List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name This indicates the computer host name.
MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control)
address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
This indicates the MAC address of the client computer.
IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this client computer.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
100
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 101
CHAPTER 5
WAN Setup
5.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN screens. Use these screens to
configure your CellPipe 7130 RG for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another
network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local
Area Network), and other networks, so that a computer in one location can
communicate with computers in other locations.
The figure below shows the WAN modes supported by the CellPipe 7130 RG (A):
Ethernet Mode and DSL mode. Note that in Ethernet mode, B is the Internet
Access Device (IAD).
Figure 16 LAN and WAN
Internet
WAN
LAN
A
WAN
LAN
A
DSL MODE
ETHERNET MODE
Internet
B
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
102
See Section 5.7 on page 123 for advanced technical information on WAN.
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Mode screen lets you choose between DSL and Ethernet for your Internet
connection (Section 5.4 on page 104).
•The Connect screen lets you view, remove or add a layer-2 WAN interface
(Section 5.5 on page 105).
•The Services screen lets you view and configure the WAN settings on the
CellPipe 7130 RG for Internet access (Section 5.6 on page 110).
Table 14 WAN Setup Overview
CONNECT SERVICES
INTERFACE DSL LINK
TYPE CONNECTION
MODE WAN SERVICE
TYPE CONNECTION SETTINGS
ATM EoA Default Mode
VLAN MUX
Mode
PPPoE PPP user name and
password, WAN IP address,
DNS server and default
gateway
IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS
server and default gateway
Bridging N/A
PPPoA PPP user name and
password, WAN IP address,
DNS server and default
gateway
IPoA WAN IP address, NAT, DNS
server and default gateway
PTM VLAN MUX
Mode
MSC Mode
PPPoE PPP user name and
password, WAN IP address,
DNS server and default
gateway
IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS
server and default gateway
Bridging N/A
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 103
5.2 What You Need to Know
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower
layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the
same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your
ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA,
they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user
authentication.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the CellPipe 7130 RG, which makes it
accessible from an outside network. It is used by the CellPipe 7130 RG to
communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or
dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the CellPipe 7130 RG tries to access
the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the
subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use
the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method).
Ethernet Default Mode
MSC Mode
PPPoE PPP user name and
password, WAN IP address,
DNS server and default
gateway
IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS
server and default gateway
VLAN MUX
Mode PPPoE PPP user name and
password, WAN IP address,
DNS server and default
gateway
IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS
server and default gateway
Bridging N/A
Table 14 WAN Setup Overview
CONNECT SERVICES
INTERFACE DSL LINK
TYPE CONNECTION
MODE WAN SERVICE
TYPE CONNECTION SETTINGS
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
104
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is is a LAN and WAN networking technology
that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information
called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM
uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit (VC) between
two endpoints before the actual data exchange begins.
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2
standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link
Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way
of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM.
5.3 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP
address. Get this information from your ISP.
5.4 The Mode Screen
The CellPipe 7130 RG can work in DSL or Ethernet mode depending on your
Internet account subscription. Note that you can only enable one mode at a time.
Figure 17 Network > WAN > Mode
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 105
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
5.5 The Connect Screen
The CellPipe 7130 RG must have a layer-2 interface to allow users to use the DSL
port or Ethernet WAN port to access the Internet. The Connect screen lets you
choose the layer-2 interface that the CellPipe 7130 RG uses. The layer-2 interface
determines how data is transported, whether in frames (Ethernet) or cells (DSL),
from the source (such as a computer on your LAN) to the destination. The screen
varies depending on the interface type you select.
Table 15 Network > WAN > Mode
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Link
Selection Select how you want to connect to the Internet:
DSL: Select this if you have a DSL account and you want to connect to
the Internet using the DSL port.
Ethernet: Select this if you have a broadband modem or router to
access the Internet. Connect the GigE port to your broadband modem
or router.
Apply Click this button to save your changes.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
106
Note: The ATM, PTM and Ethernet layer-2 interfaces cannot work at the same time.
Figure 18 Network > WAN > Connect: PTM or Ethernet
Figure 19 Network > WAN > Connect: ATM
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 107
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
5.5.1 Connect Configuration
Click the Add button in the Connect screen to open the following. Use this screen
to create a new Connect (or layer-2) interface. At the time of writing, you can
configure only one PTM or Ethernet Connect interface on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 16 Network > WAN > Connect
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this to enable the current Connect (or layer-2) interface. Note
that checking this automatically:
• Disables the other Connect interfaces
•Configures the WAN > Mode screen
If you check Active in the WAN > Connect: DSL ATM Interface
Configuration screen, the CellPipe 7130 RG uses DSL ATM to connect
to the Internet. It also selects DSL in the WAN > Mode screen.
If you check Active in the WAN > Connect: ETH WAN Interface
Configuration screen. The CellPipe 7130 RG disables the previous
DSL ATM connection and starts connecting to the Internet through
Ethernet. It also selects Ethernet in the WAN > Mode screen.
Interface Select an interface for which you want to configure here.
PTM: The CellPipe 7130 RG uses the VDSL technology for data
transmission over the DSL port.
ATM: The CellPipe 7130 RG uses the ADSL technology for data
transmission over the DSL port.
Ethernet: The CellPipe 7130 RG transmits data over the Ethernet
WAN port. Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your
network already.
Interface This is the name of the interface.
Vpi This is the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI).
Vci This is the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI).
Category This is the ATM traffic class.
Link Type This is the DSL link type of the ATM Connect interface.
Connection Mode This displays the connection mode of the connect interface.
QoS This displays whether QoS (Quality of Service) is enabled on the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Remove Click the Remove button to delete this interface from the CellPipe
7130 RG. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to
delete the interface.
Note: You cannot remove the Connect interface when a WAN
service is associated with it.
Add Click this button to create a new Connect interface.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
108
You can configure and use multiple ATM Connect interfaces using different VPI
and/or VCI values. The screen varies depending on the interface type you select.
Figure 20 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit DSL ATM
Figure 21 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit: DSL PTM/Ethernet WAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 17 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ATM PVC
Configuration VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define
a virtual circuit. This section is available only when you configure an
ATM Connect interface.
VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 109
VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local
management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
Select DSL Link
Type Select EoA (Ethernet over ATM) to have an Ethenet header in the
packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one
PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all
connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for
different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and
RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods.
Select PPPoA (PPP over ATM) to allow just one PPPoA connection over
a PVC.
Select IPoA (IP over ATM) to allow just one RFC 1483 routing
connection over a PVC.
Encapsulation
Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-
down list. Choices are:
•VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single
ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the
CellPipe 7130 RG needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a
VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This
reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol
information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload.
•LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried
over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in
the Select DSL Link Type field.
•LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2
Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to
identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE
802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is
available only when you select IPoA in the Select DSL Link Type
field.
•LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are
encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the
SNAP header. This is available only when you select EoA in the
Select DSL Link Type field.
Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are
non-time sensitive, such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on)
bandwidth for voice or data traffic.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications
with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay
variation.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for
connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay
variation.
Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find
the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the
sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.
This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR.
Table 17 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
110
5.6 The Services Screen
Use this screen to view and/or create WAN services over a layer-2 interface. Click
Network > WAN > Internet Connection. The summary table shows you the
configured WAN services (connections) on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
To use NAT, firewall or IGMP proxy in the CellPipe 7130 RG, you need to configure
a WAN connection with PPPoE or IPoE.
Sustainable
Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that
can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR.
Note that system default is 0 cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or
Realtime VBR.
Maximum
Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells
that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than
65535.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or
Realtime VBR.
Select
Connection Mode Select Default Mode to allow only one WAN service over a single
virtual circuit.
Select MSC Mode to allow multiple WAN services over a single virtual
circuit. Each WAN connection has its own MAC address.
Select VLAN MUX Mode to allow multiplexing of multiple protocols
over a single virtual circuit. You need to assign a VLAN ID and priority
level to traffic through each WAN connection. All WAN connections
share one MAC address.
This field is not available if you select PPPoA or IPoA as the DSL link
type. The CellPipe 7130 RG uses Default Mode automatically for
PPPoA or IPoA.
Enable Quality Of
Service Select this option to activate QoS (Quality of Service) on this interface
to group and prioritize traffic. Traffic is grouped according to the VLAN
group.
The QoS setting applies to all WAN connections over the same PVC.
This field is not available when you select CBR or Realtime VBR.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes and go back to the previous
screen.
Table 17 Network > WAN > Connect: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 111
Note: When a Connect interface is in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC Mode, you can
configure up to eight WAN services shared by both interfaces.
Figure 22 Network > WAN > Services
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Network > WAN > Services
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This shows the name of the interface used by this connection.
A default name atmx or ptm0_x (where x starts from 0 and is the
index number of ATM layer-2 interface) indicates the DSL port.
The ppp0_x name (where x starts from 1 and is the index number of
PPP connection on the CellPipe 7130 RG) indicates a PPP connection
via any one of the WAN interface.
The eth4_x (where x starts from 1 and is the index number of
ethernet connection on the CellPipe 7130 RG) indicates the Ethernet
WAN interface (the physical Ethernet WAN port).
The number after the underscore (_) represents either the index
number of connections through the same interface or the VPI/VCI
values assigned to the ATM layer-2 interface.
The number after the dot (.) represents the VLAN ID number assigned
to traffic sent through this connection.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Description This is the service name of this connection.
The first number represents the index number of connections over the
same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this
connection. The next two numbers are the VPI and VCI numbers. 0
and 33 are the default VPI and VCI numbers.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Type This shows the layer-2 interface type and method of encapsulation
used by this connection.
IPoW stands for IPoE used in an Ethernet WAN connection.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
112
5.6.1 WAN Connection Configuration
Click the Edit or Add button in the WAN Service screen to configure a WAN
connection.
5.6.1.1 WAN Interface
This screen displays when you add a new WAN connection.
Figure 23 Network > WAN > Services: Add/Edit
Rate This shows the maximum data rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic sent
through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no limit on
transmission rate.
Vlan8021p This indicates the 802.1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through
this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level
assigned.
VlanMuxId This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through
this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number
assigned.
ConnId This shows the index number of each connection. This displays N/A
when the interface used by the connection is in Default Mode.
IGMP This shows whether IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is
activated or not for this connection. IGMP is not available when the
connection uses the bridging service.
NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this interface. NAT is
not available when the connection uses the bridging service.
Firewall This shows whether the firewall is activated or not for this connection.
The firewall is not available when the connection uses the bridging
service.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the Remove icon to delete the WAN connection.
Add Click Add to create a new connection.
Table 18 Network > WAN > Services
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 113
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.6.1.2 Service Type
If you set the DSL link type to PPPoA or IPoA for the ATM interface and configure
a WAN connection using the ATM interface, you only need to configure the Enter
Service Description field in this screen.
Figure 24 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit: Service Type
Figure 25 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit: Service Type - PPPoA or IPoA
Table 19 Network > WAN > Services: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select a layer 2
interface for this
service
Select ptm0 to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use the VDSL
technology for data transmission.
Select atmx (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM
layer-2 interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI values) to use the
DSL port as the WAN port and use the ADSL technology for data
transmission.
Select eth4 if you want to use the Ethernet WAN port as the WAN
port.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
114
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.6.1.3 WAN IP Address and DNS Server
The screen differs by the encapsulation you selected in the previous screen. See
Section 5.7 on page 123 for more information.
Table 20 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select WAN
service type Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP.
Choices are PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), IP over Ethernet and
Bridging.
Enter Service
Description Specify a name for this connection or use the automatically generated
one.
Rate Limit Enter the maximum transmission rate in Kbps for traffic sent through the
WAN connection. Otherwise, leave this field blank to disable the rate
limit.
This field is not available for an ATM connection. For the PTM connection,
the Connection Mode in the Connect > Add: PTM screen should be
MSC Mode with QoS enabled.
Tag VLAN ID
for egress
packets
Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing
traffic through this connection.
This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode.
Enter 802.1P
Priority IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into
a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service.
Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through
this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode.
Enter 802.1Q
VLAN ID Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this
connection.
This field is available when the PTM interface is in VLAN MUX mode.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 115
PPPoE or PPPoA
This screen displays when you select PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) in the WAN
Service Configuration screen or set the DSL link type to PPPoA for the ATM
interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface.
Figure 26 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: PPPoE or PPPoA
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: PPPoE or PPPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name
in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name,
then enter both components exactly as given.
PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.
PPPoE Service
Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here.
This field is not available for a PPPoA connection.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
116
Authentication
Method The CellPipe 7130 RG supports PAP (Password Authentication
Protocol) and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol).
CHAP is more secure than PAP; however, PAP is readily available on
more platforms.
Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for
outgoing calls. Options are:
AUTO - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts either CHAP or PAP when
requested by this remote node.
CHAP - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts CHAP only.
PAP - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts PAP only.
MSCHAP - Your CellPipe 7130 RG accepts MSCHAP only. MS-CHAP is
the Microsoft version of the CHAP.
Enable Fullcone
NAT Select this option to enable full cone NAT on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Dial on Demand Select this check box when you do not want the connection up all the
time and specify an idle time-out in the Inactivity Timeout field.
Inactivity
Timeout Specify an idle time-out when you select Dial on Demand. The
default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout.
Use Static IPv4
Address A static IPv4 address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic
IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time
you connect to the Internet. Select this if you do not have a dynamic
IP address.
IPv4 Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
Enable PPP
Debug Mode Select this option to display PPP debugging messages on the console.
Bridge PPPoE
Frames Between
WAN and Local
Ports
Select this option to forward PPPoE packets from the WAN port to the
LAN ports and from the LAN ports to the WAN port.
In addition to the CellPipe 7130 RG's built-in PPPoE client, you can
select this to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client
software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the CellPipe
7130 RG. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP
address.
This is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not
appropriate.
Clear this if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE
client software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
This field is not available for a PPPoA connection.
Enable IGMP
Multicast Proxy Select this check box to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP
proxy on this connection. This allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to get
subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Table 21 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: PPPoE or PPPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 117
IPoE
This screen displays when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service
Configuration screen.
Figure 27 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoE
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP
address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you
connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address.
Enable DHCP
Option 60 Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the CellPipe 7130
RG in DHCP requests that the CellPipe 7130 RG sends to a DHCP
server when getting a WAN IP address.
Vendor Class
Identifier Enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60), such as the type of the
hardware or firmware.
Enable DHCP
Option 61 Select this to identify the CellPipe 7130 RG in DHCP requests that the
CellPipe 7130 RG sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP
address.
IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the CellPipe 7130
RG. For example, the WAN connection index number.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
118
IPoA
This screen displays only when you set the DSL link type to IPoA for the ATM
interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface.
Figure 28 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoA
DUID Type Select Other to enter any string that identifies the CellPipe 7130 RG
in the DUID field.
Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the
CellPipe 7130 RG’s hardware address, that is the MAC address in the
DUID field.
Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based on Enterprise
Number) to enter the vendor’s registered private enterprise number.
DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Identifier Enter a unique identifier assigned by the vendor.
This field is available when you select DUID-EN in the DUID Type
field.
Enable DHCP
Option 125 Select this to add vendor specific information to DHCP requests that
the CellPipe 7130 RG sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP
address.
Manufacturer
OUI Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually
the first three bytes of the MAC address.
Product Class Enter the product class of the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Model Name Enter the model name of the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Serial Number Enter the serial number of the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Use the following
Static IP address Select this if you have a static IP address.
WAN IP
Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
WAN Subnet
Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
WAN gateway
IP Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Table 22 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 119
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.6.1.4 NAT, IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation
The screen is available only when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN
Service Configuration screen or set the DSL link type to IPoA for the ATM
interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface.
Figure 29 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - NAT and IGMP: IPoE/IPoA
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit Service Type 2: IPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
WAN Subnet
Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Table 24 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - NAT and IGMP: IPoE/IPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable NAT Select this check box to activate NAT on this connection.
Enable Fullcone
NAT Select this check box to activate full cone NAT on this connection.
This field is available only when you select Enable NAT.
Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate Firewall on this connection.
Enable IGMP
Multicast Proxy Select this check box to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP
proxy on this connection. This allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to get
subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
120
5.6.1.5 Default Gateway
The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service
Configuration screen.
Figure 30 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Default Gateway: PPPoE,
PPPoA, IPoE or IPoA
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.6.1.6 DNS Server
The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service
Configuration screen.
Table 25 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Default Gateway: PPPoE, PPPoA,
IPoE or IPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Selected Default
Gateway
Interfaces
Available Routed
WAN Interfaces
Select a WAN interface through which you want to forward the traffic.
Select a WAN interface in the Available Routed WAN Interfaces
and use the left-facing arrow to move it to the Selected Default
Gateway Interfaces to use that interface as the default gateway.
To remove a WAN interface from the Selected Default Gateway
Interfaces, use the righ-facing arrow.
The interface on the top of the list gets the highest priority.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 121
Note: If you configure only one PVC with IPoA or static IPoE connection using the
ATM interface on the CellPipe 7130 RG, you must enter the static DNS server
address.
Figure 31 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - DNS Server: PPPoE, PPPoA,
IPoE or IPoA
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - DNS Server: PPPoE, PPPoA,
IPoE or IPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select DNS
Server Interface
from available
WAN interfaces
Select this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG get the DNS server addresses
from the ISP automatically.
Selected DNS
Server Interfaces
Available WAN
Interfaces
Select a WAN interface through which you want to obtain the DNS
related information.
Select a WAN interface in the Available WAN Interfaces and use
the left-facing arrow to move it to the Selected DNS Server
Interfaces to use that interface as the DNS server.
To remove a WAN interface from the Selected DNS Server
Interfaces, use the righ-facing arrow.
The interface on the top of the list gets the highest priority.
Use the following
Static DNS IP
address
Select this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG use the DNS server
addresses you configure manually.
Primary DNS
server Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
122
5.6.1.7 Configuration Summary
This read-only screen shows the current WAN connection settings.
Figure 32 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Configuration Summary
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Secondary
DNS server Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Table 26 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - DNS Server: PPPoE, PPPoA,
IPoE or IPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 27 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Configuration Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port / VPI / VCI This is the DSL port number, VPI and VCI for an ATM connection.
This displays N/A for an Ethernet WAN conenction or not available for
a PTM connection.
Connection Type This is the encapsulation method used by this connection.
Service Name This is the name of the service.
Service Category This is the ATM traffic class.
This field is blank for a PTM or Ethernet WAN conenction.
IP Address This shows whether the WAN IP address is assigned by the ISP,
manually configured or not configurable.
Service State This shows whether this service is active or not.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 123
5.7 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe
7130 RG features described in this chapter.
Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The CellPipe 7130
RG can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the CellPipe 7130 RG is in
routing mode, it supports the following methods.
IP over Ethernet
IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered
across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed
between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that
they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates
routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells.
PPP over Ethernet
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing
functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF
standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a
broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that
works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS).
NAT This shows whether NAT is active or not for this connection.
Full Cone NAT This shows whether full cone NAT is active or not for this connection.
Firewall This shows whether Firewall is active or not for this connection.
IGMP Multicast This shows whether IGMP multicasting is active or not for this
connection.
Quality Of
Service This shows whether QoS is active or not for this connection.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes.
Table 27 Network > WAN > Services > Add/Edit - Configuration Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
124
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network
services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service
provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as
it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the CellPipe 7130 RG (rather than individual
computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed,
since the CellPipe 7130 RG does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all
of the LANs’ computers will have access.
PPPoA
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A
PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The CellPipe 7130
RG encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM
PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM
(digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on
PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM
Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple
protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second
method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit
(VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information.
Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is
carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific
virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be
dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is
fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information
being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and
processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 125
have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily
depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate
the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This
agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real
time data such as audio and video connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This
parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM
cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum
PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the
line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It
specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual
connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at
the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to
the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR
again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a
maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 33 Example of Traffic Shaping
ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic
Management 4.0 Specification.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
126
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if
no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate
delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of
bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be
dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video
and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections.
Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into
real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed
amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being
sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video
conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement
varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty
connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is
commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst
levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection
would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers.
However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the
network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer.
IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP
assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be
enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the
encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default
gateway.
Full Cone NAT
In full cone NAT, the NAT router maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP
address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network. The NAT
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 127
router also maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the
internal IP address and port.
In the following example, the CellPipe 7130 RG maps the source address of all
packets sent from the internal IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B
on the external network. The CellPipe 7130 RG also performs NAT on all incoming
packets sent to IP address 2 and port B and forwards them to IP address 1, port
A.
Figure 34 Full Cone NAT Example
Symmetric NAT
The full, restricted and port restricted cone NAT types use the same mapping for
an outgoing packet’s source address regardless of the destination IP address and
port. In symmetric NAT, the mapping of an outgoing packet’s source address to a
source address in another network is different for each different destination IP
address and port.
In the following example, the CellPipe 7130 RG maps the source address IP
address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network for
packets sent to IP address 3 and port C. The CellPipe 7130 RG uses a different
mapping (IP address 2 and port M) for packets sent to IP address 4 and port D.
A host on the external network (IP address 3 and port C for example) can only
send packets to the internal host via the external IP address and port that the NAT
router used in sending a packet to the external host’s IP address and port. So in
2, B
1, A
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
128
the example, only 3, C is allowed to send packets to 2, B and only 4, D is allowed
to send packets to 2, M.
Figure 35 Symmetric NAT
Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned
into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A
device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly
talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must
first go through a router.
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and
security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one
subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN,
thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same
building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and
more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments,
all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all
broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the
VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch
on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or
dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN
and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the
network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and
1, A 2, M
2, B
4, D
4, E
3, C
5, B
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 129
contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/
length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information),
starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for
Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then
that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining
twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096
VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that
only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given
as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify
priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN
configurations are 4,094.
Multicast
IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1
recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers
IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP
version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP
version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information
about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections
4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and
can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not
assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address
224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of
all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order
to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers
group.
At start up, the CellPipe 7130 RG queries all directly connected networks to gather
group membership. After that, the CellPipe 7130 RG periodically updates this
information.
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without
it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 Bits
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
130
The CellPipe 7130 RG can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
1The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information
sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually
enter them in the DNS server fields.
2If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the
CellPipe 7130 RG’s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS
server address from the ISP.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 131
CHAPTER 6
LAN Setup
6.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many
computers are attached. A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a
building or floor of a building.
The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP
addresses.
• See Section 6.4 on page 134 for more information on LANs.
• See Appendix E on page 373 for more information on IP addresses and
subnetting.
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The LAN IP screen lets you set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your
CellPipe 7130 RG and configure other LAN TCP/IP settings (Section 6.3 on page
133).
LAN
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
132
6.2 What You Need To Know
IP Address
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do
computers on a LAN share one common network number. This is known as an
Internet Protocol address.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
CellPipe 7130 RG will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP
address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by
the CellPipe 7130 RG unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows clients to obtain TCP/IP
configuration at start-up from a server. This CellPipe 7130 RG has a built-in DHCP
server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that
support DHCP client capability.
RIP
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing
information with other routers.
Multicast and IGMP
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1
sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network).
Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody
and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
There are two versions 1 and 2. IGMP version 2 is an improvement over version 1
but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without
it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS
server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client
machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 133
6.3 The LAN IP Screen
Click Network > LAN to open the IP screen. See Section 6.4 on page 134 for
background information. Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address
and subnet mask of your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 36 LAN > IP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 28 LAN > IP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAN TCP/IP
IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your CellPipe 7130 RG
in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for
example 255.255.255.0 (factory default).
DHCP Setup
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
134
6.4 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe
7130 RG features described in this chapter.
Active DHCP Select this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as a DHCP server or DHCP
relay agent.
Otherwise, deselect this to not have the CellPipe 7130 RG provide any
DHCP services. The DHCP server will be disabled.
IP Pool
Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP
address pool.
Pool Size This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.
DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server
If you do not configure DNS servers, the CellPipe 7130 RG uses its LAN IP address and
tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that itself is the DNS server. When a LAN client sends a
DNS query to the CellPipe 7130 RG, the CellPipe 7130 RG forwards the query to its
system DNS server you configured in the WAN screen.
First DNS
Server Enter the first DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the
CellPipe 7130 RG passes to the DHCP clients.
Second DNS
Server Enter the second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the
CellPipe 7130 RG passes to the DHCP clients.
IGMP Snooping
Active IGMP
Snooping Select this option to enable IGMP snooping. This allows the CellPipe
7130 RG to passively learn multicast group.
Active IP Alias Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the CellPipe
7130 RG.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your CellPipe 7130 RG in dotted decimal
notation.
IP Subnet
Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for
example 255.255.255.0 (factory default).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 28 LAN > IP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 135
LANs, WANs and the CellPipe 7130 RG
The actual physical connection determines whether the CellPipe 7130 RG ports are
LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN
network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next.
Figure 37 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows
individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can
configure the CellPipe 7130 RG as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as
a server, the CellPipe 7130 RG provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If
you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or
else the computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The CellPipe 7130 RG is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP
clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not
assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers.
LAN TCP/IP
The CellPipe 7130 RG has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses
and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do
computers on a LAN share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If
the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP
WAN
LAN
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
136
addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet
mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you
have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when
the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select
a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the
Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the CellPipe 7130 RG. The Internet
Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for
private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise.
Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254
individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are
reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number
while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to
remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your CellPipe 7130 RG, but make sure
that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
CellPipe 7130 RG will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP
address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by
the CellPipe 7130 RG unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are
isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you
can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet
Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP
addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned
from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet
access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for
your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger
organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP
addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address
assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private
Internets” and RFC 1466, “Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 137
IP Alias
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks
over the same Ethernet interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG supports three logical LAN
interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the CellPipe 7130 RG itself
as the gateway for each LAN network.
When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access
between the LAN's logical networks (subnets).
Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap.
The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A and B.
Figure 38 Physical Network & Partitioned Logical Networks
Ethernet
Interface
A: 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.24
B: 192.168.2.1 - 192.168.2.24
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
138
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 139
CHAPTER 7
Wireless LAN
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing
your wireless network, including the following.
• Turning the wireless connection on or off.
• Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network.
• Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network.
• Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the
wireless network.
See Chapter 2 on page 29 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless
connection in an example scenario.
See Section 7.10 on page 159 for advanced technical information on wireless
networks.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This chapter describes the CellPipe 7130 RG’s Network > Wireless LAN screens.
Use these screens to set up your CellPipe 7130 RG’s wireless connection.
•The General screen lets you turn the wireless connection on or off, set up
wireless security and make other basic configuration changes (Section 7.4 on
page 143). You can also configure the MAC filter to allow or block access to the
CellPipe 7130 RG based on the MAC addresses of the wireless stations.
•The More AP screen lets you set up multiple wireless networks on your CellPipe
7130 RG (Section 7.5 on page 152).
•Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup
(WPS). WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly, when connecting to other
WPS-enabled devices.
Use the WPS screen (see Section 7.6 on page 153) to enable or disable WPS,
generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information
about the CellPipe 7130 RG’s WPS status.
Use the WPS Station (see Section 7.7 on page 155) screen to set up WPS by
pressing a button or using a PIN.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
140
•The WDS screen lets you set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the
CellPipe 7130 RG acts as a bridge with other access points (Section 7.8 on page
156).
•The Advanced Setup screen lets you change the wireless mode, and make
other advanced wireless configuration changes (Section 7.9 on page 158).
You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless
connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless
radio channel and some security in the General screen.
7.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie
radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking
devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is
just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios
attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not
require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of
most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless
networking standards available with different methods of data encryption.
Wireless Network Construction
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can
connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and
wireless clients, extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or
more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless
clients connect to one another in order to exchange information.
Network Names
Each network must have a name, referred to as the SSID - “Service Set
IDentifier”. The “service set” is the network, so the “service set identifier” is the
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 141
network’s name. This helps you identify your wireless network when wireless
networks’ coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose
from.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed,
civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into
numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place
without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select
a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the
number of available channels also varies.
Wireless Security
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data
networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without
security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the
network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network she/he can
either steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have
been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data
network, or understand the data carried on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that
only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a
“key” phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the
information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can
understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are
given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the
old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at
all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are
secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For
example, the WPA-PSK security standard is perfectly secure if you use a long key
which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if
you use a short key which is very easy to guess.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just
people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security.
Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is
in place.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
142
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use
obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a
way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your
mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point
(which you know was made in 1971) you could use “70dodchal71vanpoi” as your
security key.
Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to
limitations of distance, interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with
interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference
may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control
communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric
motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects
(such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
7.3 Before You Begin
Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See
Section 7.2 on page 140 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to
you.
• What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support (IEEE 802.11g,
for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?
• What security options do the other wireless devices support (WPA-PSK, for
example)? What is the best one to use?
• Do the other wireless devices support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you
can set up a well-secured network very easily.
Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to
set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this
is somewhat more complicated to do.
• What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to
configure advanced options, ensure that you know precisely what you want to
do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them alone.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 143
7.4 The General Screen
Note: If you are configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG from a computer connected to the
wireless LAN and you change the CellPipe 7130 RG’s SSID or security
settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to
confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match
the CellPipe 7130 RG’s new settings.
Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen.
Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Wireless LAN Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.
Channel
Selection Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel or use Auto to have the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically
determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless
interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is
as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as
possible. The channel number which the CellPipe 7130 RG is currently
using then displays next to this field.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
144
Bandwidth Select whether the CellPipe 7130 RG uses a wireless channel width of
20MHz or 40MHz.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps
whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds
of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio
channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40
MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the
environment hinders the wireless signal.
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless
devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support
channel bonding.
This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n
Only or 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen.
Control
Sideband This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and
set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set
in the Channel field) should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel
bands.
This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n
Only or 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen.
Network
Name (SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a
wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access
point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32
printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.
Note: If you are configuring the CellPipe 7130 RG from a computer
connected to the wireless LAN and you change the CellPipe
7130 RG’s SSID or wireless security settings, you will lose your
wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You
must then change the wireless settings of your computer to
match the CellPipe 7130 RG’s new settings.
Hide Network
Name (SSID) Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a
station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Enable
Wireless
Multicast
Forwarding
(WMF)
Select this check box to allow the CellPipe 7130 RG to convert wireless
multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic.
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the CellPipe 7130
RG when wireless LAN is enabled.
Security
Mode See the following sections for more details about this field.
MAC Filter Click this button to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure whether the
wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to
access the CellPipe 7130 RG using this SSID.
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 145
7.4.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless devices to communicate with the access
points without any data encryption or authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your CellPipe 7130 RG, your
network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 40 Wireless LAN > General: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click this to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 30 Wireless LAN > General: No Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security
Mode Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
146
7.4.2 WEP Encryption
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN
to display the General screen. Select WEP from the Security Mode list.
Figure 41 Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security
Mode Choose WEP from the drop-down list box.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 147
7.4.3 WPA(2)-PSK
In order to configure and enable WPA(2)-PSK authentication; click Network >
Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
from the Security Mode list.
Figure 42 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK
WEP
Encryption WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) provides data encryption to prevent
unauthorized wireless stations from accessing data transmitted over the
wireless network.
Select 64-bit or 128-bit to enable data encryption.
Key 1 to Key
4The WEP key is used to secure your data from eavesdropping by
unauthorized wireless users. Both the CellPipe 7130 RG and the wireless
stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
Only one key can be activated at any one time. Select a default key to use
for data encryption.
If you chose 64-bit in the WEP Encryption field, then enter any 5
characters (ASCII string) or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F")
preceded by 0x for each key.
If you chose 128-bit in the WEP Encryption field, then enter 13
characters (ASCII string) or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F")
preceded by 0x for each key.
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
148
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
7.4.4 WPA(2) Authentication
Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication; click the
Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen. Select WPA or
WPA2 from the Security Mode list.
Note: WPA or WPA2 is not available if you enable WPS before you configure WPA or
WPA2 in the Wireless LAN > General screen.
Table 32 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Auto Generate
Key This field is only available for WPA-PSK.
Select this option to have the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically generate
an SSID and pre-shared key. The SSID and Pre-Shared Key fields will
not be configurable when you select this option.
Security Mode Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Active
Compatible This field is only available for WPA2-PSK. Select this if you want the
CellPipe 7130 RG to support WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data
encryption.
Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or
AES.
Pre-Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the
same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a
simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters
(including spaces and symbols).
Group Key
Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new
group key out to all clients.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 149
Note: If you select WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN > General screen, the WDS
and WPS features are not available on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 43 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 33 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.
Active
Compatible This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the
CellPipe 7130 RG to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously.
Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data
encryption.
Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or
AES.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
150
7.4.5 MAC Filter
This screen allows you to configure the CellPipe 7130 RG to give exclusive access
to specific devices (Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the CellPipe
7130 RG (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control)
address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of
hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the
MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
WPA2
Preauthenticatio
n
This field is available only when you select WPA2.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client
(already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication
with another AP before connecting to it. Select Enabled to turn on
preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled.
Network Re-auth
Interval This field is available only when you select WPA2.
Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and
passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between
10 and 2147483647 seconds.
Note: If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS
server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has
priority.
Group Key
Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server
sends a new group key out to all clients.
Authentication Server
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted
decimal notation.
Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The
default port number is 1812.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator
instructs you to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be
shared between the external authentication server and the CellPipe
7130 RG.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and
your CellPipe 7130 RG. The key is not sent over the network.
Table 33 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 151
Use this screen to change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s MAC filter settings. Click the
Edit button in the Wireless LAN > General screen. The following screen
displays.
Figure 44 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.4.6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule
Click the Add button in the MAC Filter screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 45 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter > Add
Table 34 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Restrict
Mode
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the table below.
Select Disabled to turn off MAC address filtering.
Select Allow to permit access to the CellPipe 7130 RG, MAC addresses not
listed will be denied access to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Select Deny to block access to the CellPipe 7130 RG, MAC addresses not
listed will be allowed to access the CellPipe 7130 RG
#This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC
Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied
access to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Modify Click the Remove icon to delete the entry.
Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Add Click this to create a new MAC filtering rule.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
152
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.5 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple wireless networks on the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > More AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 46 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC
Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied
access to the CellPipe 7130 RG in these address fields. Enter the MAC
addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character
pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Apply Click this to save your changes and go back to the previous screen.
Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of each SSID profile.
Active Select the check box to activate an SSID profile.
SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the CellPipe
7130 RG’s BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service
Set with which a wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When
a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that
is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility.
Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 153
7.5.1 More AP Edit
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the
More AP screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 47 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP: Edit
See Section 7.4 on page 143 for more details about the fields in this screen.
7.6 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your CellPipe 7130
RG.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without
having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection
between two devices. Both devices must support WPS.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
154
Click Network > Wireless LAN >WPS. The following screen displays.
Figure 48 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WPS Setup
Enable WPS Select the check box to activate WPS on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
PIN Number This shows the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the CellPipe 7130
RG. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to
connect to using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Generate Click this button to have the CellPipe 7130 RG create a new PIN.
WPS Status This displays Configured when the CellPipe 7130 RG has connected to a
wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or
wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and
wireless security settings also appear in the screen.
This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless
or wireless security changes on the CellPipe 7130 RG or you click
Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and
wireless security settings.
Release_Co
nfiguration This button is available when the WPS status is Configured but not
configurable if you disable WPS.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security
settings for WPS connections on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 155
7.7 The WPS Station Screen
Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button
Configuration (PBC) or PIN Configuration.
Note: If you select No Security in the Wireless LAN > General screen and click
Push Button in the WPS Station screen, the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically
changes to use WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mixed mode and generates a pre-
shared key.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station. The following screen displays.
Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Push Button Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within
wireless range of the CellPipe 7130 RG) to your wireless network. This
button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a
menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within
two minutes of pressing this button.
Or input
station's PIN
number
Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection
with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your
wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking
the device’s settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes
to have it present its PIN to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
156
7.8 The WDS Screen
A Wireless Distribution System (WDS) is a wireless connection between two or
more APs. Use this screen to set up your WDS links between the CellPipe 7130
RGs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security
settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between the devices is
made.
Note: You cannot use WDS when WPS is enabled or wireless security is set to “WPA"
or "WPA2". The wireless security settings apply to both WDS links and the
connections between the CellPipe 7130 RG and any wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is only compatible with other CellPipe 7130 RGs of
the same model.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS. The following screen displays. WDS is
turned on and this screen is configurable when the CellPipe 7130 RG's wireless
security mode is No Security, WEP or WPA(2)-PSK.
Figure 50 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 157
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WDS
Operating Mode Select the operating mode for your CellPipe 7130 RG.
•Access Point + Bridge - The CellPipe 7130 RG functions as a
bridge and access point simultaneously.
•Wireless Bridge - The CellPipe 7130 RG acts as a wireless network
bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs. In this mode,
clients cannot connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG wirelessly.
You need to know the MAC address of the peer device, which must be of
the same model and also WDS-enabled. The CellPipe 7130 RG can
establish up to four wireless links with other APs.
Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access
Point + Bridge.
Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC
address manually in the table below.
Select Enabled(Scan) to turn on WDS, search and display the
available APs within range in the table below.
Remote Bridges
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the peer device that your CellPipe 7130 RG
wants to make a bridge connection with.
You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.
This field is available only when you select Enabled(Scan) in the
Bridge Restrict field.
Select the check box and click Apply to have the CellPipe 7130 RG
establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device.
SSID This field is available only when you select Enabled(Scan) in the
Bridge Restrict field.
This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range.
BSSID This field is available only when you select Enabled(Scan) in the
Bridge Restrict field.
This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within
range.
Refresh Click Refresh to update the Remote Bridges MAC Address table
when Bridge Restrict is set to Enabled(Scan).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
158
7.9 The Advanced Setup Screen
To configure advanced wireless settings, click Network > Wireless LAN >
Advanced Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 51 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS
Threshold Enter a value between 0 and 2432.
Fragmentation
Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value
between 256 and 2432.
Number of
Wireless
Stations
Allowed
Specify the maximum number (from 1 to 64) of the wireless stations that
may connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Output Power Set the output power of the CellPipe 7130 RG. If there is a high density
of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with
other APs. Select one of the following 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or
100%.
Multicast Rate Select a data rate at which the CellPipe 7130 RG transmits wireless
multicast traffic.
If you select a high rate, multicast traffic may occupy all the bandwidth
and cause metwork congestion.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 159
7.10 Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the
appendix.
802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to only allow IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Select 802.11g Only to allow IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN
devices can associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG only when they use the
short premble type.
Select 802.11n Only to only allow IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. This can increase
transmission rates, although IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g clients will
not be able to connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g
compliant WLAN devices to associate with the CellPipe 7130 RG. The
CellPipe 7130 RG adjusts the transmission rate automatically according
to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices.
Select 802.11 b/g/n mixed mode to allow both IEEE802.11b,
IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the CellPipe 7130 RG. The transmission rate of your CellPipe 7130 RG
might be reduced.
802.11
Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks
(networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS
handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your
CellPipe 7130 RG might be reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11
Mode to 802.11b Only.
Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long
or Short. The default setting is Long. See the appendix for more
information.
This field is not configurable and the CellPipe 7130 RG uses Short when
you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11g Only or 802.11n Only.
Apply Click this to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 40 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
160
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 52 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network,
devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such
as the printer) or with the Internet. Your CellPipe 7130 RG is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific
channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with
the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also
protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
AB
AP
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 161
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in
the CellPipe 7130 RG’s Web Configurator.
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up
in the wireless network.
7.10.3.1 SSID
Normally, the CellPipe 7130 RG acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the
SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the CellPipe 7130
RG does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID
to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for
unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless
devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network.
7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number,
called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal
Table 41 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices
are sometimes not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause
them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in
information colliding and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless
devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the
CellPipe 7130 RG. The lower the value, the more often the devices
must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see
below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send
information to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are
two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different
preamble mode than the CellPipe 7130 RG does, it cannot
communicate with the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use
the wireless network.
Fragmentation
Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks,
while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network
is not very busy.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
162
characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC
address for each device in the wireless network, see the device’s User’s Guide or
other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the CellPipe 7130 RG which devices are
allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use
the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel,
and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not
matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the
MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use
the wireless network.
7.10.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to
use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network
before they can use it. However, every device in the wireless network has to
support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user
in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you
do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for
your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the
wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore,
there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and
password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless
network.
7.10.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the
wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret
code, you cannot understand the message.
1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks.
These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 163
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication.
(See Section 7.10.3.3 on page 162 for information about this.)
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA
or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no
encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the
wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network
with the CellPipe 7130 RG and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there
is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only
supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up
Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your CellPipe 7130 RG, you can also
select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some
of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-
PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the
WPA compatible option in the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless
network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the
wireless network must have the same key.
7.10.4 WiFi Protected Setup
Your CellPipe 7130 RG supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way
to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification,
defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without
having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works
Table 42 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
Weakest No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Stronges
tWPA2-PSK WPA2
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
164
between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s
documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device
itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification
Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two
devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another
device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a
secure network by themselves.
7.10.4.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each
WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need
to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS
PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical
button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
1Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one
another.
2Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its
configuration utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this - for the CellPipe 7130 RG, see Section 7.7 on page 155).
3Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the CellPipe
7130 RG you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds.
4Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the
network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the
enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless
clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list,
WPS was successful.
7.10.4.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This
may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can
generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface).
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 165
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you
want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify,
not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you
need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN
method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually
the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless
router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the
second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security
information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or
wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN
method.
1Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
2Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s
Guide for how to do this.
3Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the
WPS section of the client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide
for how to find the WPS PIN - for the CellPipe 7130 RG, see Section 7.6 on page
153).
4Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
Note: If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another
device’s PIN, you can either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s
PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
5Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device
itself.
6On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If
you can connect, WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
166
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook
computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Figure 53 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
7.10.4.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role.
One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security
settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives
network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is
already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates
the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
ENROLLEE
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
This device’s
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
WPS
from other device:
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
START
WPS
START
REGISTRAR
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 167
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook
computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point.
Figure 54 How WPS works
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is
active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the
registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in
each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the
process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client
is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can
some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an
existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both
functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the
enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to
another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A configured wireless client
can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all
subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to
act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults.
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WPS HANDSHAKE
REGISTRAR
ENROLLEE
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
168
7.10.4.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1
are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In
this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar
randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is
unconfigured and has no existing information.
Figure 55 WPS: Example Network Step 1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1
supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with
the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use
the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it
already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing
security information to Client 2.
Figure 56 WPS: Example Network Step 2
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of
range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access
REGISTRARENROLLEE
SECURITY INFO
CLIENT 1 AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 1 AP1
ENROLLEE
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
SECURITY INFO
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 169
point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use
it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
Figure 57 WPS: Example Network Step 3
7.10.4.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client
communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll
multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the
first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee,
for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second
device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add
non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether
the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check
the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the
network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the
key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS
device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
CLIENT 1 AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
SECURITY INFO
ENROLLEE
AP2
EXISTING CONNECTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
170
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you
press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the
other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is
because the registrar has no way of identifying the “correct” enrollee, and
cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible
way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two
devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be
unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open
the access point’s configuration interface and look at the list of associated
clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access
point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS
handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain
access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients
(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown
MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 171
CHAPTER 8
Network Address Translation
(NAT)
8.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Network Address Translation (NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address
of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used
within one network to a different IP address known within another network.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Port Forwarding screen lets you configure forward incoming service
requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 8.3 on page 172).
•The DMZ Host screen lets you configure a default server (Section 8.4 on page
176).
•The ALG screen lets you enable SIP ALG on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 8.5
on page 177).
8.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from
a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address)
before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back,
NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the
inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
172
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for
example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though
NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside
world.
8.3 The Port Forwarding Screen
This summary screen provides a summary of all port forwarding rules and their
configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new port forwarding
rules and delete existing rules.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded,
and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a
service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some
cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than
one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify
a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to
a port or a range of ports.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
To access this screen, click Network > NAT. The following screen appears.
Figure 58 NAT Port Forwarding
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 173
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 NAT Port Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Name Select a pre-defined service from the drop-down list box. The pre-
defined service port number(s) and protocol will display in the External
port, Internal port and Protocol fields.
Otherwise, select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where
you can manually enter the port number(s) and select the IP protocol.
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
Server IP
Address Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service.
External Port
Start Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External
Port End field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the
end port number in the External Port End field.
External Port
End Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Port
Start field above and then enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that
begins with the port number in the External Port Start field above.
Internal Port
Start Enter the port number to which you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to
translate the incoming port.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Internal
Port End field.
For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you
want the incoming ports translated.
Internal Port
End Enter the last port of the translated port range.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service.
Time Start
(24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule begins.
Hour - 0 - 23
Minute - 0 - 59
The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM.
Time Stop
(24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule stops.
Hour - 0 - 23
Minute - 0 - 59
The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM.
Select Days Select each day of the week the recurring schedule is effective.
Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
174
No. This is the rule index number (read-only).
Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packets for this
virtual server.
WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is
forwarded.
External Start
Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
External End
Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
Internal Start
Port This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
Internal End
Port This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
Server IP
Address This field displays the inside IP address of the server.
Time Start
(24H) This displays the time at which the port forwarding schedule begins.
Time Stop
(24H) This displays the time at which the port forwarding schedule ends.
Days This displays the day(s) of the week the recurring schedule is effective.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port
forwarding rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note
that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Table 43 NAT Port Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 175
8.3.1 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen
This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule. Select User Define in
the Service Name field or click the rule’s Edit icon in the Port Forwarding
screen to open the following screen.
Figure 59 Port Forwarding Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Port Forwarding Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule. This field is read-only if you click the
Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen.
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port forwarding
rules.
External Start
Port Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External
End Port field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the
end port number in the External End Port field.
External End
Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Start
Port field above and then enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that
begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above.
Internal Start
Port Enter the port number here to which you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to
translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number
of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
176
8.4 The DMZ Host Screen
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP
address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the
NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen.
Figure 60 NAT > DMZ Host
Internal End
Port Enter the last port of the translated port range.
Server IP
Address Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server.
Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Time Start
(24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule begins.
Hour - 0 - 23
Minute - 0 - 59
The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM.
Time Stop
(24H) Specify the hour and minute when the port forwarding schedule stops.
Hour - 0 - 23
Minute - 0 - 59
The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM.
Select Days Select each day of the week the recurring schedule is effective.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 44 Port Forwarding Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 177
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
8.5 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG
allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses
embedded in the data stream. The SIP ALG translates the CellPipe 7130 RG’s
private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not
need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if you enable the SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable or disable the SIP ALG in the CellPipe 7130 RG. To
access this screen, click NAT > ALG.
Figure 61 NAT > ALG
Each field is described in the following table.
Wait for the CellPipe 7130 RG to fully reboot before accessing it again.
Table 45 NAT > DMZ Host
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from
ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server, the CellPipe 7130 RG
discards all packets received for ports that are not specified
in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 46 NAT > ALG
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active SIP ALG Select this check box to allow SIP sessions to pass through the CellPipe
7130 RG. SIP is a signaling protocol used in sending of voice signals
over Internet Protocol.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
178
8.6 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe
7130 RG features described in this chapter.
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the
Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in
the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP
address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP
Table 47 Services and Port Numbers
SERVICES PORT NUMBER
ECHO 7
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25
DNS (Domain Name System) 53
Finger 79
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) 110
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) 119
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 161
SNMP trap 162
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 1723
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 179
addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a
single host on the Internet.
Figure 62 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
D=192.168.1.36
192.168.1.1
IP address assigned by ISP
A=192.168.1.33
B=192.168.1.34
C=192.168.1.35
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
180
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 181
CHAPTER 9
File Sharing
9.1 Overview
Share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your CellPipe 7130
RG with users on your network.
The following figure is an overview of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s file server feature.
Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 63 File Sharing Overview
• See Section 9.1.2 on page 182 for an explanation of file-sharing terms.
• See Section 9.2.1 on page 184 for file-sharing examples.
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter
Use the File Sharing screen (Section 9.2 on page 183) to enable file-sharing
server on the CellPipe 7130 RG and configure the workgroup name.
A
B
C
Chapter 9 File Sharing
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
182
9.1.2 What You Need to Know About File-Sharing
Workgroup name
This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and
share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the
workgroup name when you set up a network.
Shares
When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the CellPipe 7130
RG is given a folder, called a “share”. If a USB hard drive connected to the CellPipe
7130 RG has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share.
You can also configure a “share” to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device.
File Systems
A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and
storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have
different file systems. The file-sharing feature on your CellPipe 7130 RG supports
File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32 file systems.
Windows/CIFS
Common Internet File System (CIFS) is a standard protocol supported by most
operating systems in order to share files across the network.
CIFS runs over TCP/IP but uses the SMB (Server Message Block) protocol found in
Microsoft Windows for file and printer access; therefore, CIFS will allow all
applications, not just Web browsers, to open and share files across the Internet.
The CellPipe 7130 RG uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its
file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage
devices connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG. CIFS protocol is supported on
Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your
systems specifications for CIFS compatibility).
NFS
Network File System (NFS) is a protocol most commonly used on Unix-like
systems in order to share files across the network.
Samba
SMB is a client-server protocol used by Microsoft Windows systems for sharing
files, printers, and so on.
Chapter 9 File Sharing
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 183
Samba is a free SMB server that runs on most Unix and Unix-like systems. It
provides an implementation of an SMB client and server for use with non-Microsoft
operating systems.
File Transfer Protocol
This is a method of transferring data from one computer to another over a
network such as the Internet.
9.1.3 Before You Begin
Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network and turned on.
1Connect the USB device to one of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB ports. Make sure the
CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network.
2The CellPipe 7130 RG detects the USB device and makes its contents available for
browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external
power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on.
Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by CellPipe 7130 RG, see the
troubleshooting for suggestions.
9.2 The Server Settings Screen
Use this screen to set up file sharing via the CellPipe 7130 RG. To access this
screen, click USB Services > File Sharing.
Figure 64 USB Services > File Sharing
Chapter 9 File Sharing
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
184
Each field is described in the following table.
9.2.1 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a
Computer
You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Note: The example in this User’s Guide shows you how to use Microsoft’s Windows
XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating system’s
documentation for how to browse your file structure.
1Open Windows Explorer to share files in the attached USB device using Windows
Explorer browser.
Table 48 USB Services > File Sharing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable File
Sharing
Services
Select this to enable file sharing through the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Server
Configuration
Host Name This displays the CellPipe 7130 RG system name.
Workgroup
Name You can add the CellPipe 7130 RG to an existing or a new workgroup on
your network. Enter the name of the workgroup which your CellPipe
7130 RG automatically joins.
You can set the CellPipe 7130 RG’s workgroup name to be exactly the
same as the workgroup name to which your computer belongs to.
Note: The CellPipe 7130 RG will not be able to join the workgroup if
your local area network has restrictions set up that do not
allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your
network administrator.
Apply/Save Click this to save your changes to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.
Chapter 9 File Sharing
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 185
2In Windows Explorer’s Address bar type a double backslash “\\” followed by the IP
address of the CellPipe 7130 RG (the default IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG is
192.168.1.1) and press [ENTER]. A screen asking for password authentication
appears. Type the user name and password you use to access the system and
click OK. (The default system user name is admin and the default system
password is telus.)
Figure 65 File Sharing via Windows Explorer
Note: Once you log in to the file share via your CellPipe 7130 RG, you do not have to
log in again unless you restart your computer.
Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has
its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 9 File Sharing
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
186
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 187
CHAPTER 10
Media Server
10.1 Overview
The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and
photos from a USB storage device connected to your CellPipe 7130 RG (without
having to copy them to another computer). The CellPipe 7130 RG can function as
a DLNA-compliant media server. The CellPipe 7130 RG streams files to DLNA-
compliant media clients, such as the Xbox 360, Playstation 3 and so on.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and
electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home
network.
In the following figure, DLNA-compliant devices (B) can play music and video files
or view images stored on a USB device (C) that is connected to the CellPipe 7130
RG (A).
Figure 66 File Sharing Overview
Refer to Section 2.6 on page 65 for a tutorial on using this feature on Windows 7
and a Digital Media Adapter.
C
A
B
DLNA-compliant clients
Chapter 10 Media Server
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
188
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this chapter
•Use the Media Server Configuration screen (Section 10.3 on page 189) to
enable the media server on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
•Use the Remove Disk Safely screen (Section 10.3 on page 189) to safely
disconnect the USB device from the CellPipe 7130 RG.
10.1.2 Before You Begin
Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network and turned on.
1Connect the USB device to one of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s USB ports. Make sure the
CellPipe 7130 RG is connected to your network.
2The CellPipe 7130 RG detects the USB device and makes its contents available for
browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external
power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on.
Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by CellPipe 7130 RG, see the
troubleshooting for suggestions.
10.2 The Media Server Configuration Screen
Use this screen to enable the media server on your CellPipe 7130 RG. To access
this screen, click USB Services > Media Server.
Figure 67 USB Services > Media Server
Chapter 10 Media Server
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 189
Each field is described in the following table.
10.3 The Remove Disk Safely Screen
Use this screen to safely remove the USB device from the CellPipe 7130 RG. This
stops processes to the USB device and prevents your data from being corrupted.
To access this screen, click USB Services > Media Server > Remove Disk
Safely.
Figure 68 USB Services > Media Server > Remove Disk Safely
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 49 USB Services > Media Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Media
Server (DLNA) Select this to turn on the media server and let (DLNA-compliant) media
clients on your network play media files located in the published shares.
Apply/Save Click this to save your changes to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.
Table 50 USB Services > Media Server > Remove Disk Safely
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Remove Disk
Safely Click this stop all processes to the USB device. You can then disconnect
the USB device safely.
Chapter 10 Media Server
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
190
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 191
CHAPTER 11
Firewall
11.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the CellPipe 7130 RG firewall
settings.
The CellPipe 7130 RG firewall is a packet filtering firewall and restricts access
based on the source/destination computer network address of a packet and the
type of application.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Incoming screen lets you view and configure incoming IP filtering rules
(Section 11.4 on page 195).
•The DoS screen lets you activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS)
attacks (Section 11.4 on page 195).
11.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Basics
Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called
TCP/IP. TCP/IP, in turn, is a set of application protocols that perform specific
functions. An “extension number”, called the "TCP port" or "UDP port" identifies
these protocols, such as HTTP (Web), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), POP3 (E-mail),
etc. For example, Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80.
When computers communicate on the Internet, they are using the client/server
model, where the server "listens" on a specific TCP/UDP port for information
requests from remote client computers on the network. For example, a Web
server typically listens on port 80. Please note that while a computer may be
intended for use over a single port, such as Web on port 80, other ports are also
Chapter 11 Firewall
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
192
active. If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful, a hacker
could attack it over an unprotected port.
Some of the most common IP ports are:
Default Filtering Policies
Filtering rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which
they apply.
The default rule for incoming traffic blocks all incoming connections from the WAN
to the LAN. If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN,
you will need to create custom rules to allow it.
Note: If you configure filtering rules without a good understanding of how they work,
you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the
protected network. Make sure you test your rules after you configure them.
These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address, Destination IP
address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator.
Your customized rules take precedence and override the CellPipe 7130 RG’s
default rules.
Denial of Service (DoS)
Denial of Service (DoS) prevents customers, users, clients or other computers
from accessing data on a computer. This is usually accomplished by interrupting or
overwhelming the computer with bad or excessive information requests.
Table 51 Common IP Ports
21 FTP 53 DNS
23 Telnet 80 HTTP
25 SMTP 110 POP3
Chapter 11 Firewall
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 193
11.3 The Firewall Screen
Click Security > Firewall > Incoming to display the following screen. This
screen displays a list of the configured incoming filtering rules.
Figure 69 Firewall > Incoming
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Firewall > Incoming
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Firewall Select this check box to enable the firewall on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
When the firewall is enabled, the CellPipe 7130 RG blocks all incoming
traffic from the WAN to the LAN. Create custome rules below to allow
certain WAN users to access your LAN or to allow traffic from the WAN
to a certain computer on the LAN.
Active Select this check box to enable the rule.
Filter Name This displays the name of the rule.
Interfaces This displays the WAN interface(s) to which this rule is applied.
Protocol This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to
which this rule applies.
Source Address
/ Mask This displays the source IP addresses and subnet mask to which this
rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to
Any.
Source Port This is the source port number.
Dest. Address /
Mask This displays the destination IP addresses and subnet mask to which
this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is
equivalent to Any.
Dest. Port This is the destination port number.
Start. Time This displays the time at which the firewall schedule begins.
Stop. Time This displays the time at which the firewall schedule ends.
Week. Days This displays the day(s) of the week the firewall schedule is effective.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent
rules move up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 11 Firewall
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
194
11.3.1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules
In the Incoming screen, click Add to display this screen and refer to the following
table for information on the labels.
Figure 70 Firewall > Incoming: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Add Click Add to create a new rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 52 Firewall > Incoming (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 53 Firewall > Incoming: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable the rule.
Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
To add a firewall rule, you need to configure at least one of the
following fields (except the Interface field).
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMP)
and enter the protocol (service type) number in the port field. Select
NONE to apply the rule to any protocol.
Source IP
Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Source Subnet
Mask Enter the source subnet mask.
Chapter 11 Firewall
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 195
11.4 The DoS Screen
Click Security > Firewall > DoS to display the following screen. This lets you
turn on protection against DoS attacks.
Figure 71 Security > Firewall > DoS
Source Port Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
Destination IP
Address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Destination
Subnet Mask Enter the destination subnet mask.
Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination.
Start Time Specify the hour and minute when the firewall schedule begins.
Hour - 0 - 23
Minute - 0 - 59
The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM.
Stop Time Specify the hour and minute when the firewall schedule stops.
Hour - 0 - 23
Minute - 0 - 59
The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM.
Select Days Select each day of the week the firewall schedule is effective.
Interface Select Select All to apply the rule to all interfaces on the CellPipe
7130 RG or select the specific WAN interface(s) to which this rule
applies.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Table 53 Firewall > Incoming: Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Firewall
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
196
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Security > Firewall > DoS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active DoS Select this check box to detect and reject old or duplicate packets to
protect against Denial-of-Service attacks
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 197
CHAPTER 12
Certificate
12.1 Overview
The CellPipe 7130 RG can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate
users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the
certificate owner’s identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange
public keys for use in authentication.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and
import the CellPipe 7130 RG's CA-signed certificates (Section 12.4 on page
204).
•The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the
CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 12.4 on page 204).
12.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of
each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like
CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification
authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the
certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the
CellPipe 7130 RG to generate certification requests that contain identifying
information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a
certification authority.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
198
12.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the
CellPipe 7130 RG’s summary list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 72 Local Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Local Certificates
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is
recommended that you give each certificate a unique name.
In Use This field displays how many applications use the certificate.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner,
such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department),
O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that
each certificate have unique subject information.
Type This field displays what kind of certificate this is.
request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid
certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which
then issues a certificate. Use the Load Certificate screen to import the
certificate and replace the request.
signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
Action Click the View button to open a screen with an in-depth list of
information about the certificate (or certification request).
Click the Load Signed button to import a valid certification to replace
the request.
Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification
request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is
configured to use.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 199
12.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate
Request to open the My Certificate Create screen. Use this screen to have the
CellPipe 7130 RG generate a certification request.
Figure 73 Create Certificate Request
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Create
Certificate
Request
Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the CellPipe
7130 RG generate a certification request.
Import
Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate
that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your
computer to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 55 Local Certificates (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 56 Create Certificate Request
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this
certificate.
Common Name Select a radio button to identify the certificate’s owner by IP address,
domain name or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted
decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field
provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 31 ASCII
characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification
purposes only and can be any string.
Organization Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which
the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including
spaces, but the CellPipe 7130 RG drops trailing spaces.
State/Province
Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the state or province where the
certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including
spaces, but the CellPipe 7130 RG drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region
Name Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is
located.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
200
After you click Apply, the Certificate Request Details screen displays. Click
Load Signed Certificate to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the
request (see Section 12.3.4 on page 203). Otherwise, click Back to return to the
Local Certificates screen. See Section 12.3.3 on page 202 for field information.
Figure 74 Certificate Request Details
12.3.2 Import Certificate
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Import
Certificate to open the Import Local Certificate screen. Follow the instructions
in this screen to save an existing certificate to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation.
Table 56 Create Certificate Request (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 201
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can
import it.
Figure 75 Import Local Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Import Local Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this
certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the CellPipe
7130 RG.
Private
Key Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the CellPipe
7130 RG.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
202
12.3.3 Certificate Details
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates to open the My Certificates
screen (see Figure 72 on page 198). Click the View icon to open the Certificate
Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and
change the certificate’s name.
Figure 76 Certificate Details
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 203
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.3.4 Load Signed Certificate
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Load Signed or
the Load Signed Certificate button in the Certificate Details screen of a
Table 58 Certificate Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want
to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this
certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces).
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. signed
means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. request
means this is a certification request.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the
certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organization (O), State (ST)
and Country (C).
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the
binary certificate into a printable form.
This displays null in a certification request.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to
friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a
text editor and save the file on a management computer for later
distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Private Key This read-only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the
binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the private key into an e-mail to send to
friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a
text editor and save the file on a management computer for later
distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Signing Request This read-only text box displays the request information in Privacy
Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to
convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
This displays null in a signed certificate.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Load Signed
Certificate This button is available only in a certification request details screen
Click this to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the
request.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
204
certification request to open the Load Certificate screen. Follow the instructions
in this screen to save a valid certificate to repalce the request.
Figure 77 Load Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Advanced Setup > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following
screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification
authorities that you have set the CellPipe 7130 RG to accept as trusted. The
CellPipe 7130 RG accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on
Table 59 Load Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name This field is read-only and displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the CellPipe
7130 RG.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 205
this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is
signed by one of these certification authorities.
Figure 78 Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 60 Trusted CA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the
certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or
department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is
recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means
that a Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Action Click View to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about
the certificate.
Click Remove to delete the certificate.
Import
Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of
a certification authority that you trust to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
206
12.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click the View button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use
this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority’s
certificate.
Figure 79 Trusted CA: View
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 61 Trusted CA: View
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means
that a Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the
certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),
Organization (O) and Country (C).
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 207
12.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the
following screen. The CellPipe 7130 RG trusts any valid certificate signed by any of
the imported trusted CA certificates.
Figure 80 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary
certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends
or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text
editor and save the file on a management computer for later
distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Table 61 Trusted CA: View (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 62 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate Name Enter the name that identifies this certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 12 Certificate
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
208
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 209
CHAPTER 13
Static Route
13.1 Overview
The CellPipe 7130 RG usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic
from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the CellPipe 7130 RG send
data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the CellPipe
7130 RG’s LAN interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG routes most traffic from A to the
Internet through the CellPipe 7130 RG’s default gateway (R1). You create one
static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You
create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a
router R3 connected to the LAN.
Figure 81 Example of Static Routing Topology
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Static Route screens let you view and configure IP static routes on the
CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 13.2 on page 210).
WAN
R1
R2
A
R3
LAN
Chapter 13 Static Route
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
210
13.2 The Static Route Screen
Click Advanced > Static Route to open the Static Route screen.
Figure 82 Advanced > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 63 Advanced > Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
#This is the number of an individual static route.
Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number.
Netmask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final
destination.
Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch
on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The
gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Remove Click the icon to remove a static route from the CellPipe 7130 RG. A
window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
Add Click this to create a new rule.
Apply Click this to apply your changes to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 13 Static Route
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 211
13.2.1 Static Route Edit
Click the Add button in the Static Route screen. Use this screen to configure the
required information for a static route.
Figure 83 Static Route: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 Static Route: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Destination IP
Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a
route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the
subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host
ID.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have
the WAN interface(s) already configured in the WAN screens.
Use Gateway
IP Address Select this option and enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The
gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your CellPipe 7130
RG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their
destinations.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 13 Static Route
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
212
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 213
CHAPTER 14
Policy Forwarding
14.1 Overview
Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the CellPipe
7130 RG takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the
CellPipe 7130 RG to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based
routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.
You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users
through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load
sharing.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Policy Forwarding screens let you view and configure routing policies on the
CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 14.2 on page 213).
14.2 The Static Route Screen
Click Advanced > Policy Forwarding to open the Policy Forwarding screen.
Figure 84 Advanced > Policy Forwarding
Chapter 14 Policy Forwarding
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
214
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
14.2.1 Policy Forwarding Setup
Click the Add button in the Policy Forwarding screen. Use this screen to
configure the required information for a policy route.
Figure 85 Policy Forwarding: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Advanced > Policy Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Policy Name This is the name of the rule.
SourceIP This is the source IP address.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol.
SourcePort This is the source port number.
SourceMAC This is the source MAC address.
WAN This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Remove Click the icon to remove a rule from the CellPipe 7130 RG. A window
displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the rule.
Add Click this to create a new rule.
Table 66 Policy Forwarding: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
Source IP
Address Enter the source IP address.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Source Port Enter the source port number.
Source Mac
Address Enter the source MAC address.
Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have
the WAN interface(s) already configured in the WAN screens.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Chapter 14 Policy Forwarding
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 215
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 66 Policy Forwarding: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Policy Forwarding
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
216
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 217
CHAPTER 15
RIP
15.1 Overview
Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to
exchange routing information with other routers.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The RIP screen lets you set up RIP settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 15.2
on page 217).
15.2 The RIP Screen
Click Advanced > RIP to open the RIP screen.
Figure 86 Advanced > RIP
Chapter 15 RIP
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
218
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Advanced > RIP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the
RIP packets that the CellPipe 7130 RG sends (it recognizes both formats
when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2
carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most
networks, unless you have an unusual network topology.
Operation Select Passive to have the CellPipe 7130 RG update the routing table
based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its
route information to other routers in this interface.
Select Active to have the CellPipe 7130 RG advertise its route
information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers.
Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings.
Apply/Save Click Apply/Save to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 219
CHAPTER 16
Quality of Service (QoS)
16.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with
minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of
bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the
network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and
make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand.
Configure QoS on the CellPipe 7130 RG to group and prioritize application traffic
and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The CellPipe 7130 RG assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet
accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than
those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications
to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require
a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as
Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet
radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
220
16.1.1 QoS Overview
The following figure gives an overview of how to configure QoS on this CellPipe
7130 RG:
1First, you have to configure WAN connection(s) in Network > WAN > Connect.
Refer to Section 2.4 on page 40 for a tutorial on how to prioritize traffic and
eliminate congestion over the ATM network (at the ATM layer).
2Configure queue settings in Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup according to the
priority you want to apply to different types of traffic.
Configure class settings in Advanced > QoS > Class Setup. This associates
queues with PVCs by mapping the priority of queues to the index number of PVCs.
16.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you lets you enable or disable QoS and set the
upstream bandwidth (Section 16.3 on page 221).
•The Queue Setup screen lets you lets you configure QoS queue assignment
(Section 16.4 on page 222).
•The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section
16.5 on page 225).
•The Policer Setup screen lets you specify the committed rate and committed
burst size for incoming packets (Section 16.5 on page 225).
•The Monitor screen lets you view the CellPipe 7130 RG's QoS-related packet
statistics (Section 16.7 on page 233).
16.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
PVC1, ATM QoS 1
PVC2, ATM QoS 2
Queue 1
Queue 2
1 2
3
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 221
QoS versus Cos
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same
flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic
in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as
a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated
Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet
header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces
the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ
Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched
packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking
device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service
based on the tag or marker.
16.3 The Quality of Service General Screen
Click Advanced Setup > Quality of Service to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See
Section 16.1 on page 219 for more information.
Figure 87 QoS General
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
222
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
16.4 The Queue Setup Screen
Click QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
Figure 88 QoS Queue Setup
Table 68 QoS General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network
performance.
WAN Managed
Upstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interface that you
want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface’s actual
transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interface speed to
100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission
speed of 100 Mbps.
You can set this number higher than the interface’s actual transmission
speed. The CellPipe 7130 RG uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual
upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than
the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interface’s actual
transmission speed. This will cause the CellPipe 7130 RG to not use
some of the interface’s available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the CellPipe 7130 RG automatically sets this
number to be 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission
speed.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 223
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 QoS Queue Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this button to create a new entry.
No. This is the index number of this entry.
Active Select the check box to enable the queue.
Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface This shows the name of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s interface through which
traffic in this queue passes.
Priority This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight This shows the weight of this queue.
Buffer
Management This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
Queue management algorithms determine how the CellPipe 7130 RG
should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion).
Scheduler
Algorithm This shows the scheduling algorithm that the CellPipe 7130 RG uses.
A scheduling algorithm is how the CellPipe 7130 RG selects packets for
QoS.
Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this
queue.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the queue.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent
rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
224
16.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click the Add button or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a
queue.
Figure 89 QoS Queue Setup: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 QoS Queue Setup: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 4) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to
higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority
queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the CellPipe 7130 RG divides
the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with
larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Buffer
Management This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue
management algorithm that allows the CellPipe 7130 RG buffer to accept
as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new
packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again
(packets are transmitted out of it).
Scheduler
Algorithm As of writing, this is set to PQWFQ by default. This stands for Priority
Queue Weighted Fair Queuing, which is a packet-based scheduling
algorithm that allocates more bandwidth to critical applications.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 225
16.5 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into
data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination
address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For
example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol
port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the CellPipe 7130 RG forwards out
through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run
more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that
they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen.
Figure 90 QoS Class Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on
this queue.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 70 QoS Queue Setup: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 71 QoS Class Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this button to create a new classifier.
Order This field displays the index number of the classifier.
Active Select the check box to enable the classifier.
Class Name This is the name of the classifier.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
226
Classification
Criteria This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface
from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC
address of traffic that matches this classifier.
Forward To This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is
forwarded out.
DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this
classifier.
VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the
classifier.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that
subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 71 QoS Class Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 227
16.5.1 QoS Class Edit
Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Class Setup screen to configure a
classifier.
Figure 91 QoS Class Setup: Add
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
228
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 QoS Class Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Class
Configuration
Active Select to enable or disable this classifier.
Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
Classification
Order Select an existing number to set the classifier’s order. The order takes
effect after clicking Apply and can be viewed in QoS > Class
Setup.
Select Last to put this rule in the end of the classifier list.
Forward to
Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be
forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG forward
traffic of this class according to the default routing table.
DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box.
If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the CellPipe 7130
RG replaces the DSCP field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG keep the DSCP field in
the packets.
802.1p Mark Select a priority level with which the CellPipe 7130 RG replaces the
IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG keep the 802.1p
priority field in the packets.
VLAN ID Tag If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number (between 1 and 4095)
with which the CellPipe 7130 RG replaces the VLAN ID of the frames.
If you select Remove, the CellPipe 7130 RG deletes the VLAN ID of
the frames before forwarding them out.
If you select Add, the CellPipe 7130 RG treat all matched traffic
untagged and add a second VLAN ID.
If you select Unchange, the CellPipe 7130 RG keep the VLAN ID in
the packets.
To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen
already.
Criteria Configuration
Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification.
Basic
From Interface Select from which Ethernet port or wireless interface traffic of this
class should come.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 229
Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched
traffic.
If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC
address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 8021Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level and
VLAN ID in the Others section.
Source
MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits
a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the
traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0“ for the bit(s) of the
matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a
MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted
decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP
address.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the source subnet mask.
TCP/UDP Port
Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check
box and enter the port number(s) of the source.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified
criteria from this classifier.
Destination
MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the
packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits
a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the
traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0“ for the bit(s) of the
matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a
MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted
decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP
address.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the destination subnet mask.
TCP/UDP Port
Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check
box and enter the port number(s) of the source.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified
criteria from this classifier.
Others
Table 72 QoS Class Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
230
802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type
field.
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from
the drop down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type
field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095.
IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP,
UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol
(service type) number.
IP Packet
Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet
length (from 28 to 1500) in the fields provided.
DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number
between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the
ACK (Acknowledge) flag.
DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor
Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of
the hardware or firmware.
If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that
identifies the user’s category or application type in the matched DHCP
packets.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified
criteria from this classifier.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 72 QoS Class Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 231
16.6 The Policer Setup Screen
Click QoS > Policer Setup to open the following screen. The CellPipe 7130 RG
can control ingress (or incoming) traffic by dropping packets that exceed the
committed rate and/or committed burst size specified in this screen.
A policer is a QoS policy.
Figure 92 Policer Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Policer Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this button to create a new policy.
No This field displays the index number of the policy.
Active Select the check box to enable the policy.
Name This is the name of the policy.
Regulated
Classes This shows to which classes the policy applies.
Meter Type This is set to Simple Token Bucket, which is similar to tokens in a
bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket is a
buffer that temporarily stores outgoing packets and transmits them at
an average rate.
Committed Rate This shows the maximum committed rate for the specified class/es.
Committed Burst
Size This shows the maximum committed burst size for the specified class/
es.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the
classifier.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that
subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
232
16.6.1 Policer Setup Edit
Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Policer Setup screen to configure a
classifier.
Figure 93 Add/Edit Policer Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 Add/Edit Policer Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the check box to enable the policy.
Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
Meter Type This is set to Simple Token Bucket, which uses tokens in a bucket to
control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket is a buffer that
temporarily stores outgoing packets and transmits them at an average
rate.
Committed
Rate Enter the maximum committed rate for the class/es.
Committed
Burst Size Enter the the maximum committed burst size for the class/es.
Available Class This shows all the classes created in the CellPipe 7130 RG. Select the
class that you want to include in the policy and click Add to move it to
selected class.
Selected Class This shows to which classes the policy applies. Select the class that
you want to exclude from the policy and click Remove to move it to
the available class.
Add/Remove Use these buttons to add or remove a class from either Available Class
and Selected Class boxes.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 233
16.7 The QoS Monitor Screen
To view the CellPipe 7130 RG’s QoS packet statistics, click Advanced > QoS >
Monitor. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 94 QoS > Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
16.8 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the CellPipe
7130 RG features described in this chapter.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 74 Add/Edit Policer Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 75 QoS > Monitor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Monitor
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to update this screen.
Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics.
Queue Monitor
No. This is the index number of the entry.
Name This shows the name of the queue.
Pass Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted
successfully.
Drop Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
234
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to
identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the
12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a
specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame
across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic
types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d
standard (which incorporates the 802.1p).
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow
are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different
priorities to different packet types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks
packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant
network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow.
Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of
service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices
to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition,
applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of
where the traffic is going.
Table 76 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration
messages.
Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).
Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to
jitter.
Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA
(Systems Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would
include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk
transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and
users.
Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 235
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of
Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and
a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure
illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so
that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the
DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior),
that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule,
different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources
can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
Chapter 16 Quality of Service (QoS)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
236
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 237
CHAPTER 17
Dynamic DNS Setup
17.1 Overview
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or
many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-
SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own
computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a
name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that
changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with
www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP
server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service
provider will give you a password or key.
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 17.3 on page 238) to enable DDNS and
configure the DDNS settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
17.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be
aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if
you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach
your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
Chapter 17 Dynamic DNS Setup
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
238
17.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
To change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s DDNS, click Advanced > Dynamic DNS. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 95 Advanced > Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 77 Advanced > Dynamic DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service
Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your CellPipe 7130 RG by your
Dynamic DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma
(",").
Interface Select the WAN interface to use for updating the IP address of the
domain name.
User Name Type your user name.
Password Type the password assigned to you.
Email If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name
you used to register for this service.
Key If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you
used to register for this service.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 239
CHAPTER 18
Remote Management
18.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the remote management and access
control settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
The CellPipe 7130 RG supports multiple remote management sessions running at
one time.
Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has
its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The TR-069 screen lets you configure the CellPipe 7130 RG’s TR-069 auto-
configuration settings (Section 18.3 on page 241).
•The TR-064 screen lets you enable management via TR-064 on the CellPipe
7130 RG (Section 18.3 on page 241).
•The Service Control screens let you configure through which interface(s) users
can use which service(s) to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 18.4 on page
242).
•The IP Address screens let you configure from which IP address(es) users can
use a service to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 18.5 on page 243).
18.2 The TR-069 Screen
TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your
CellPipe 7130 RG, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server
(ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an
ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML)
format over HTTP or HTTPS.
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the CellPipe 7130 RG, modify
settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the CellPipe
Chapter 18 Remote Management
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
240
7130 RG. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify
the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password.
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT to open the following screen. Use this screen
to configure your CellPipe 7130 RG to be managed by an ACS.
Figure 96 TR-069
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 78 TR-069
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inform Select Enable to activate remote management via TR-069 on the
WAN. Otherwise, select Disable.
Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the CellPipe 7130 RG
sends information to the auto-configuration server.
ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.
ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-
configuration server.
ACS Password Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-
configuration server.
WAN Interface
used by TR-069
client
Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.
If you select Multi_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured
WAN connection(s).
Display SOAP
messages on
serial console
Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console.
Connection
Request
Authentication
Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection
request from the ACS.
Chapter 18 Remote Management
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 241
18.3 The TR-064 Screen
TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum.
TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE
management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and
configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password.
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > TR064 to open the following screen.
Figure 97 TR-064
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Connection
Request User
Name
Enter the connection request user name.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the CellPipe 7130 RG,
this user name is used to authenticate the ACS.
Connection
Request
Password
Enter the connection request password.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the CellPipe 7130 RG,
this password is used to authenticate the ACS.
Connection
Request URL This shows the connection request URL.
The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the CellPipe
7130 RG.
Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 78 TR-069 (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 79 TR-064
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enanble TR064 Select the check box to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 18 Remote Management
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
242
18.4 The Service Control Screen
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > Service Control to open the following
screen. Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which
CellPipe 7130 RG interface.
Figure 98 Service Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 80 Access Control: Services
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Control Select Enable to turn on service control. Otherwise, select Disable.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Services This is the service you may use to access the CellPipe 7130 RG.
LAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you
want to allow access to the CellPipe 7130 RG from the LAN.
WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you
want to allow access to the CellPipe 7130 RG from the WAN.
Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 18 Remote Management
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 243
18.5 The IP Address Screen
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > IP Address to open the following screen.
Use this screen to specify the “trusted” computers from which an administrator
may use a service to manage the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 99 IP Address
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 81 IP Address
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Access Control
Mode Select Enable to activate the secured client list. Select Disable to
disable the list without deleting it.
IP Address This is the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can
manage the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Remove Select this check box and click the Remove button to delete this entry
from the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Add Click this button to create a new entry.
Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry.
Chapter 18 Remote Management
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
244
18.5.1 Adding an IP Address
Click the Add button in the IP Address screen to open the following screen.
Figure 100 IP Address: Add
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 82 IP Address: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Address Enter the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can
manage the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 245
CHAPTER 19
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
19.1 Overview
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that
uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A
UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its
capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can
leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The UPnP screen lets you enable UPnP on the CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 19.3 on
page 246).
19.2 What You Need to Know
How do I know if I'm using UPnP?
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear
as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the
information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate
through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network
addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and
enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows
the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
246
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal
and UPnP.
See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own
services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network
information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some
network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast
message. For security reasons, the CellPipe 7130 RG allows multicast messages
on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without
additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and CellPipe 7130 RG
This device has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play
Forum UPnP™ Implementers Corp. (UIC). The UPnP implementation supports
Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0.
See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP.
19.3 The UPnP Screen
Click Advanced > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
See Section 19.1 on page 245 for more information.
Figure 101 Advanced > UPnP
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 247
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
19.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
1Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
2Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the
Components selection box. Click Details.
Figure 102 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
Table 83 Advanced > UPnP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Activate Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP) Feature Select this check box to enable UPnP. Be aware that anyone
could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's
login screen without entering the CellPipe 7130 RG's IP
address (although you must still enter the password to access
the web configurator).
Apply/Save Click this to save the setting to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
248
3In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box
in the Components selection box.
Figure 103 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
4Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click
Next.
5Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
1Click Start and Control Panel.
2Double-click Network Connections.
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 249
3In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and
select Optional Networking Components ….
Figure 104 Network Connections
4The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays.
Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details.
Figure 105 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
250
5In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check
box.
Figure 106 Networking Services
6Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard
window and click Next.
19.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must
already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the CellPipe
7130 RG.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the CellPipe 7130 RG. Turn
on your computer and the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
1Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon
displays under Internet Gateway.
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 251
2Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Figure 107 Network Connections
3In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port
mappings there were automatically created.
Figure 108 Internet Connection Properties
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
252
4You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port
mappings.
Figure 109 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Figure 110 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
5When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port
mappings will be deleted automatically.
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 253
6Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK.
An icon displays in the system tray.
Figure 111 System Tray Icon
7Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Figure 112 Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the CellPipe 7130 RG
without finding out the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG first. This comes helpful
if you do not know the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
1Click Start and then Control Panel.
2Double-click Network Connections.
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
254
3Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Figure 113 Network Connections
4An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local
Network.
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 255
5Right-click on the icon for your CellPipe 7130 RG and select Invoke. The web
configurator login screen displays.
Figure 114 Network Connections: My Network Places
6Right-click on the icon for your CellPipe 7130 RG and select Properties. A
properties window displays with basic information about the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 115 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
Chapter 19 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
256
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 257
CHAPTER 20
Parental Control
20.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also
define time periods and days during which the CellPipe 7130 RG performs parental
control on a specific user.
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Time Restriction screen lets you give different time restrictions to each
user of your network (Section 20.2 on page 257).
•The Content Filter screen lets you restrict home network users from viewing
inappropriate websites (Section 20.3 on page 259).
20.2 The Time Restriction Screen
Use this screen to view the schedules and enable parental control on a specific
user during certain periods.
Click Advanced Setup > Parental Control to open the following screen.
Figure 116 Parental Control > Time restriction
Chapter 20 Parental Control
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
258
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
20.2.1 Adding a Schedule
Click the Add button in the Time Restriction screen to open the following
screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific user
on your network.
Figure 117 Time Restriction Configuration
Table 84 Parental Control > Time Restriction
LABEL DESCRIPTION
#This shows the index number of the schedule.
Active Select the check box to enable the schedule.
username This shows the name of the user.
MAC This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this
schedule applies.
Mon ~ Sun x indicates the day(s) on which parental control is enabled.
Start This shows the time when the schedule starts.
Stop This shows the time when the schedule ends.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the
schedule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing schedule.
Add Click Add to create a new schedule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 20 Parental Control
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 259
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
20.3 The Content Filter Screen
Use this screen to configure filtering settings to block the users on your network
from accessing certain web sites.
Click Advanced Setup > Parental Control > Content Filter to open the
following screen.
Figure 118 Parental Control > Content Filter
Table 85 Time Restriction Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter the name of the user.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this
schedule applies.
Days of the week Select check boxes for the days that you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to
perform parental control.
Start Blocking
Time
End Blocking
Time
Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which
parental control will be enforced.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Save/Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Chapter 20 Parental Control
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
260
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
20.3.1 Adding Filter Rule
Click the Add button in the URL Filter screen to open the following screen.
Figure 119 URL Filter Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 86 Parental Control >Content Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Filter Select the check box to enable URL filtering on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Blocking list The table shows the keywords contained in the URL that the CellPipe
7130 RG prohibits the users from viewing. It also shows through which
port the keyword is blocked.
# This is the index number of the rule.
Active Select the check box to enable the filtering rule.
Keyword This is the keyword that is blocked in this rule.
Port This is the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule.
Add Click Add to create a new rule.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 87 URL Filter Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Keyword Enter the keyword that the CellPipe 7130 RG blocks.
Port Number Specify the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Save/Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 261
CHAPTER 21
IGMP
21.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the IGMP screens.
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1
sender to 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network).
Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. See
RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2, respectively.
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The IGMP screen lets you select the IGMP version to use as well as configure
the settings for IGMP (Section 21.2 on page 263).
•The IGMP Source Configuration screen lets you set the server where the
CellPipe 7130 RG gets the multicast group information (Section 21.2 on page
263).
21.1.2 What You Need to Know
IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of
hosts (multicast group) in a different sub-network. A multicast IP address
represents a traffic receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses
in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting.
Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes (see the
IANA web site for more information).
IGMP Snooping
A layer-2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP
version 2) packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP
multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP
Chapter 21 IGMP
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
262
packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and
configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the CellPipe 7130 RG to
learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
The CellPipe 7130 RG forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that
it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports
that are members of that group. The CellPipe 7130 RG discards multicast traffic
destined for multicast groups that it does not know. IGMP snooping generates no
additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic
passing through your device.
IGMP Proxy
To allow better network performance, you can use IGMP proxy instead of a
multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology.
Note: Your CellPipe 7130 RG is an IGMP proxy.
In IGMP proxy, an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source (or
the root of the multicast tree) and is able to receive multicast traffic. There should
only be one upstream interface (also known as the query port) for one query VLAN
on the CellPipe 7130 RG. A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host
(such as a computer).
Chapter 21 IGMP
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 263
The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source
while computers 1, 2 and 3 are the receivers. In the figure A is connected to the
upstream interface and 1, 2 and 3 are connected to the downstream interface.
Figure 120 IGMP Proxy Network Example
The CellPipe 7130 RG will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the
upstream interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG only responds to IGMP query messages
on the upstream interface. The CellPipe 7130 RG sends IGMP query messages to
the hosts that are members of the query VLAN.
The CellPipe 7130 RG only sends an IGMP leave message via the upstream
interface when the last host leaves a multicast group.
21.2 The IGMP Screen
Use this screen to select the IGMP version to use as well as configure the settings
for IGMP.
Proxy
Multicast
Server
Hosts
Chapter 21 IGMP
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
264
Click Advanced Setup > IGMP to open the following screen.
Figure 121 IGMP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 88 IGMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Version There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are
improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
IGMP version 3 supports source filtering, reporting or ignoring
traffic from specific source address to a particular host on the
network. If you would like to read more detailed information
about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1,
please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236.
Select the IGMP version that you would like the CellPipe 7130 RG to
use.
Query Interval Specify how many seconds since the last query the CellPipe 7130 RG
waits before it queries all directly connected networks to gather
multicast group membership.
Query Response
Time Specify how many seconds the host allots for gathering membership
information from directly connected networks before it sends a report.
Last Member
Query Response
Time
Specify how many seconds the host allots for gathering membership
information from a specific IP address before it sends a report.
Robustness
Value This is the number of times the host sends a report to the CellPipe
7130 RG when the CellPipe 7130 RG queries for the host’s status.
Maximum
Multicast Groups Enter the number of multicast groups that the CellPipe 7130 RG is
allowed to join.
Maximum
Multicast Data
Sources (for
IGMPv3)
This is the maximum number of multicast servers that the host can
handle.
Chapter 21 IGMP
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 265
21.3 Interface Source Configuration
Use this screen to configure the server where the CellPipe 7130 RG gets the
multicast group information. Click Advanced > IGMP Source Configuration to
open the following screen.
Figure 122 IGMP Source Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Maximum
Multicast Group
Members
This is the maximum number of members allowed for a multicast
group.
Fast Leave
Enable Enable this to have the host stop sending multicast messages to an IP
address that has left the multicast group or a multicast group with no
members.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 88 IGMP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 89 IGMP Source Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Source
List Check this to stop having the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP proxy.
Deselect this to have the CellPipe 7130 RG act as an IGMP proxy and
then create the IP address(es) of the actual IGMP multicast servers.
#This is the index number of the server.
Active Enable this to use the server as the IGMP source configuration.
Address This is the IP address of the server that has the multicast group
membership information that the host will use.
Modify Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry,
Chapter 21 IGMP
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
266
21.3.1 Add/Edit IGMP Source
Click the Add button or Edit icon in the IGMP Source Configuration screen to
open the following. Use this screen to add or edit an IGMP source entry.
Figure 123 Interface Grouping Criteria
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Add Click this button to create a new rule.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 89 IGMP Source Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 90 Interface Grouping Criteria
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This shows whether the entry is active or not.
Address Enter the IP address of the server that has the multicast grouping
information that the host will use.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 267
CHAPTER 22
System Settings
22.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system
time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you configure system settings (Section 22.2 on page
267).
•The Time Setting screen lets you set the system time (Section 22.3 on page
269).
22.2 The General Screen
Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system
password.
Click Maintenance > System to open the General screen.
Figure 124 Maintenance > System > General
Chapter 22 System Settings
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
268
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 91 Maintenance > System > Genera
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UserName/
Password
UserName Type the user name you use to access the system.
Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the
system in this field.
New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you
type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type.
After you change the password, use the new password to access the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
Retype to
Confirm Type the new password again for confirmation.
Web Session
Timeout
Timeout Value
(sec) Enter how many minutes of inactivity the CellPipe 7130 RG waits before
automatically disconnecting a session. You need to enter the username
and password again before accessing the Web Configurator.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 22 System Settings
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 269
22.3 The Time Setting Screen
To change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s time and date, click Maintenance > System
> Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the
CellPipe 7130 RG’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 125 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 92 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Time
Current Time This field displays the time of your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Each time you reload this page, the CellPipe 7130 RG synchronizes the
time with the time server.
Current Date This field displays the date of your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Each time you reload this page, the CellPipe 7130 RG synchronizes the
date with the time server.
Time and Date
Setup
Manual Select this option to enter the time and date manually.
Get from Time
Server Select this option to have the CellPipe 7130 RG get the time and date
from the time server you specified below.
Chapter 22 System Settings
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
270
First NTP time
server
Second NTP
time server
Third NTP time
server
Fourth NTP time
server
Fifth NTP time
server
Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20
extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server.
Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this
information.
Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference
between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 92 Maintenance > System > Time Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 271
CHAPTER 23
Logs
23.1 Overview
This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and
viewing the CellPipe 7130 RG’s logs.
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or
alerts to have the CellPipe 7130 RG log and then display the logs or have the
CellPipe 7130 RG send them to a syslog server.
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The View Log screen lets you see the logs for the categories that you selected
in the Log Settings screen (Section 23.2 on page 271).
•The Log Settings screen lets you configure to where the CellPipe 7130 RG is to
send logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the CellPipe 7130 RG is to
record (Section 23.3 on page 272).
23.2 The View Log Screen
Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log
screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings
screen (see Section 23.3 on page 272).
Chapter 23 Logs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
272
The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills.
Figure 126 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
23.3 The Log Settings Screen
Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the CellPipe 7130 RG is to
send logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the CellPipe 7130 RG is to
record and display.
Table 93 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Display Select a severity level of logs to view. The CellPipe 7130 RG displays the
logs with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected.
#This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Date/Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Severity This field displays the severity level of the log.
System This field displays the system module from which the logs come.
Message This field states the reason for the log.
Chapter 23 Logs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 273
To change your CellPipe 7130 RG’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs > Log
Settings. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 127 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 94 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable or disable system logging.
Log Level Select the severity level of the logs that you want the CellPipe 7130 RG to
display, record and send to the log server.
The CellPipe 7130 RG displays and records the logs with the severity level
equal to or higher than what you selected.
Mode Select Local to record the logs and store them in the local memory of the
CellPipe 7130 RG only.
Select Remote to send logs to the specified log server.
Select Both to record the logs and store them in the local memory and
also send logs to the log server.
Syslog Server
IP Address Enter the server name or the IP address of the log server.
Syslog Server
UDP Port Enter the UDP port of the log server.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Chapter 23 Logs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
274
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 275
CHAPTER 24
Tools
Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your CellPipe 7130 RG.
24.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware, manage configuration files and
restart your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device’s configuration file or
upgrade its firmware. After you configure your device, you can backup the
configuration file to a computer. That way if you later misconfigure the device, you
can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings.
You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to
return the device to the original default settings. The firmware determines the
device’s available features and functionality.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the
label on the bottom of your CellPipe 7130 RG.
24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Firmware screen lets you upload firmware to your device (Section 24.2 on
page 276).
•The Configuration screen lets you backup and restore device configurations
(Section 24.3 on page 278). You can also reset your device settings back to the
factory default.
•The Restart screen lets you restart your CellPipe 7130 RG (Section 24.4 on
page 280).
Chapter 24 Tools
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
276
24.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Tools to open the Firmware screen. Follow the
instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your CellPipe 7130 RG. The
upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two
minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the CellPipe 7130 RG while firmware upload is in
progress!
Figure 128 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 95 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current
Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that
you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload
them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to
two minutes.
Chapter 24 Tools
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 277
After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen, wait two minutes
before logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG again.
Figure 129 Firmware Upload In Progress
The CellPipe 7130 RG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary
network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon
on your desktop.
Figure 130 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the
Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Tools to
go back to the Firmware screen.
Figure 131 Error Message
Chapter 24 Tools
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
278
24.3 The Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory
defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen,
as shown next.
Figure 132 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the CellPipe 7130 RG’s current
configuration to a file on your computer. Once your CellPipe 7130 RG is configured
and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your
configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration
file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the CellPipe 7130 RG’s current configuration to your
computer.
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved
configuration file from your computer to your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 96 Restore Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process.
Chapter 24 Tools
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 279
Do not turn off the CellPipe 7130 RG while configuration file
upload is in progress.
After you see a “restore configuration successful” screen, you must then wait one
minute before logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG again.
Figure 133 Configuration Upload Successful
The CellPipe 7130 RG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary
network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon
on your desktop.
Figure 134 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP
address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix B on page 321 for details on how to set up
your computer’s IP address.
Chapter 24 Tools
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
280
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Tools >
Configuration to go back to the Configuration screen.
Figure 135 Configuration Upload Error
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and
return the CellPipe 7130 RG to its factory defaults. The following warning screen
appears.
Figure 136 Reset Warning Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory
defaults of your CellPipe 7130 RG. Refer to Section 1.7 on page 28 for more
information on the RESET button.
24.4 The Restart Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the CellPipe 7130 RG without turning the
power off.
Chapter 24 Tools
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 281
Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the CellPipe 7130
RG reboot. This does not affect the CellPipe 7130 RG's configuration.
Figure 137 Maintenance > Tools >Restart
Chapter 24 Tools
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
282
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 283
CHAPTER 25
Diagnostic
25.1 Overview
The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the
CellPipe 7130 RG.
The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches
owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes
time to discover and impacts subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate
the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify
and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path,
CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.
25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take
to a host (Section 25.3 on page 284).
•The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 25.4 on page 285).
•The OAM Ping Test screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation,
Administration and Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific
PVC. (Section 25.4 on page 285)
25.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
How CFM Works
A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End
Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP
port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other
MEP ports information from neighbor devices’ CCMs within an MA.
CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults.
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
284
• Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR)
from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is
received, there might be a connectivity fault between them.
• Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more
information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source
MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check
and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status
report.
25.3 The General Diagnostic Screen
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown next. Ping and
traceroute help check availability of remote hosts and also help troubleshoot
network or Internet connections.
Figure 138 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 97 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TCP/IP
Address Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a
connection or trace the route packets take to.
Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered.
Traceoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the
path a packet takes to the specified host.
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 285
25.4 The 802.1ag Screen
Click Diagnostic to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM
actions.
Figure 139 802.1ag
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 98 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.1ag
Connectivity
Fault
Management
Maintenance
Domain (MD)
Name
Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this
MD.
The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or
equal to 44bytes.
Maintenance
Domain (MD)
Level
Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
286
Maintenance
Association (MA)
Name
Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this
MA.
The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or
equal to 44bytes.
Maintenance
Association (MA)
Format
Select the format which the CellPipe 7130 RG uses to send this MA
information in the domain (MD). Options are VID, String and
Integer.
If you select VID or Integer, the CellPipe 7130 RG adds the VLAN ID
you specified for an MA in the CCM.
If you select String, the CellPipe 7130 RG adds the MA name you
specified above in the CCM.
Note: The MEPs in the same MA shoule use the same MA format.
Destination MAC
Address Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the CellPipe 7130 RG
performs a CFM loopback test.
Count Set how many times the CellPipe 7130 RG send loopback messages
(LBMs).
802.1Q VLAN ID Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.
Maintenance End
Point ID Enter an ID number (1-8191) for this MEP port. Each MEP port needs a
unique ID number within an MD. The MEP ID is to identify an MEP port
used when you perform a CFM action
Status
Continuity Check
Message (CCM) This shows how many Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) are sent
and if there is any invalid CCM or cross-connect CCM.
Loopback
Message (LBM) This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if
there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received
from a remote MEP.
Linktrace
Message (LTM) This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response
(LTR).
Save Click this to save your changes back to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Enable CCM Click this button to have the selected MEP send Connectivity Check
Messages (CCMs) to other MEPs.
Disable CCM Click this button to disallow the selected MEP to send Connectivity
Check Messages (CCMs) to other MEPs.
Update CC status Click this button to reload the test result.
Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back
Message) to a specified remote end point.
Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace
Messages) to a specified remote end point.
Table 98 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 287
25.5 The OAM Ping Test Screen
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test to open the screen shown
next. Use this screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and
Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The CellPipe 7130 RG sends an
OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the
CellPipe 7130 RG. The test result then displays in the text box.
ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The
terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:
Figure 140 Virtual Circuit Topology
Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable
connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between
the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a
link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a
channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit.
F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual
channel (VC) level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP
connections, but use different predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI
and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections, and are distinguished from
data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in the cell header. Both F4
flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types.
• segment F4 flows (VCI=3)
• end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4)
• segment F5 flows (PTI=100)
• end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101)
OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availbility
between two DSL devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point
• Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices
• Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels
• Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points
Virtual Path Virtual Channel
Segment
ATM Switch
Virtual Circuit (End-to-End)
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
288
which terminates a VP or VC segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end
point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM link is terminated. Segment
loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring
ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-
end PVC.
Note: The DSLAM to which the CellPipe 7130 RG is connected must also support
ATM F4 and/or F5 to use this test.
Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface.
Figure 141 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 99 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test.
F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test.
F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test.
F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test.
F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 289
CHAPTER 26
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The
potential problems are divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•CellPipe 7130 RG Access and Login
•Internet Access
•USB Device Connection
•Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The CellPipe 7130 RG does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure the CellPipe 7130 RG is turned on.
2Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the CellPipe
7130 RG.
3Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the CellPipe 7130 RG and
plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned
on.
4Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
290
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.6 on
page 26.
2Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged
cables.
4Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
26.2 CellPipe 7130 RG Access and Login
Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has
its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG.
I forgot the IP address for the CellPipe 7130 RG.
1The default IP address is http://192.168.1.1.
2If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address
of the CellPipe 7130 RG by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for
your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter
cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be
the IP address of the CellPipe 7130 RG (it depends on the network), so enter this
IP address in your Internet browser.
3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 1.7 on page 28.
I forgot the password.
1The default admin password is telus and the default user password is admin.
Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has
its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 1.7 on page 28.
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 291
I cannot see or access the Login screen (or other screens) in the web
configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is http://192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section on page 135), use the new IP
address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting
suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the CellPipe 7130 RG.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has
JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 351.
4Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the CellPipe 7130 RG
with the default IP address. See Section 1.7 on page 28.
5If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one
of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a
computer that is connected to an ETHERNET port.
• Try to access the CellPipe 7130 RG using another service, such as Telnet. If you
can access the CellPipe 7130 RG, check the remote management settings and
firewall rules to find out why the CellPipe 7130 RG does not respond to HTTPS.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default
admin user name is admin and default admin password is telus. These fields are
case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level information. Each user level has
its own account information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG.
2Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on.
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
292
3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 26.1 on page 289.
I cannot Telnet to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen
(or other screens) in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your
browser.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to
upload new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen
(or other screens) in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your
browser.
I cannot access the CellPipe 7130 RG again after configuring a new interface
group.
Make sure your computer is connected to a LAN port in the default group.
Otherwise, you need to use the CellPipe 7130 RG’s LAN IP address for the new
group to access the CellPipe 7130 RG again.
26.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 26.
2Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the WAN screens.
These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 293
3If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings
in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP.
4Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick
Start Guide again.
5If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
1Check if you have set the Network > WAN > Mode screen to DSL to have the
CellPipe 7130 RG use the DSL port for Internet access.
2Make sure you configured a proper ATM or PTM layer-2 interface and WAN services
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP.
3If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the
DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly
from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection.
1Check if you have set the Network > WAN > Mode screen to WAN to have the
CellPipe 7130 RG use the Ethernet WAN port for Internet access.
2Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a DSL modem or router in your
netwrok.
3Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet layer-2 interface and WAN services
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP.
4If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the
DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly
from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one
type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
294
I cannot create multiple connections of the same type.
Your layer-2 interface must be in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC mode to create multiple
WAN serivces for each connection.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the
CellPipe 7130 RG), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.
1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 26.
2Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on.
3If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
1There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section
1.6 on page 26. If the CellPipe 7130 RG is sending or receiving a lot of
information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-
peer applications.
2Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer
closer to the CellPipe 7130 RG if possible, and look around to see if there are any
devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example,
microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).
3Turn the CellPipe 7130 RG off and on.
4If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one
of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it
is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some
applications.
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 295
26.4 USB Device Connection
The CellPipe 7130 RG fails to detect my USB device.
1Disconnect the USB device.
2Reboot the CellPipe 7130 RG.
3If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply,
make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on.
4Re-connect your USB device to the CellPipe 7130 RG.
26.5 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
I cannot access the CellPipe 7130 RG or ping any computer from the WLAN
(wireless AP or router).
1Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
2Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly.
3Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11
compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the CellPipe 7130 RG.
4Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the
transmission range of the CellPipe 7130 RG.
5Check that both the CellPipe 7130 RG and your wireless station are using the
same wireless and wireless security settings.
6Check if MAC Filter is configured to deny wireless access to certain MAC addresses
to the CellPipe 7130 RG. See Chapter 7 Wireless LAN in the User’s Guide for more
information.
I cannot use WDS connection.
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
296
1You can use WDS only when WPS is disabled or wireless security is set to “No
Security”, “WEP”, “WPA-PSK” or “WPA2-PSK”. The wireless security settings apply
to both WDS links and the connections between the CellPipe 7130 RG and any
wireless clients.
2WDS is only compatible with other devices of the same model.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 297
CHAPTER 27
Product Specifications
The following tables summarize the CellPipe 7130 RG’s hardware and firmware
features.
27.1 Hardware Specifications
Table 100 Hardware Specifications
Dimensions 208 (W) x 178 (D) x 36 (H) mm
Weight 465 g
Power Specification 12 V 1.5 A
Power Input 100 ~ 240 VAC 50~60HZ
RESET Button Restores factory defaults
WPS Button at least 1 second: enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WLAN Button at least 1 second: enable wireless LAN
Antennas One attached external dipole antenna, 2dBi
Built-in Switch Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45
Ethernet ports
DSL Port One RJ-11 connector over POTS
Giga Ethernet WAN
Port One RJ-45 connector for GBE WAN
HomePNA Coaxial
Port One port for HPNA v3.1 access, coax F type connector
USB Ports One USB v2.0 port for file sharing
Operation
Temperature 0º C ~ 40º C
Storage Temperature -20º ~ 60º C
Operation Humidity 20% ~ 85% RH (non-condensing)
Storage Humidity 20% ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
298
27.2 Firmware Specifications
Table 101 Firmware Specifications
Default IP Address 192.168.1.1
Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Default User Name admin
root
tech
Note: Refer to Section 3.2 on page 83 for user level
information. Each user level has its own account
information for logging into the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Default Password telus
DHCP Server IP Pool 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.132
Static Routes 16
Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of
features on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Wireless
Functionality
(wireless devices
only)
Allow the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n
wireless clients to connect to the CellPipe 7130 RG wirelessly.
Enable wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC
filtering to protect your wireless network.
Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware (when available) from the web site and
use the web configurator to put it on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Configuration Backup
& Restoration Make a copy of the CellPipe 7130 RG’s configuration. You can put
it back on the CellPipe 7130 RG later if you decide to revert back
to an earlier configuration.
HomePNA (Home
Phoneline
Networking
Alliance, also
known as HPNA)
3.1
Extend your Internet connection to the coaxial outlets in your
house. HPNA is a home networking technology for carrying
data over existing coaxial cables and telephone wiring.
DLNA Server The CellPipe 7130 RG is a DLNA-compliant media server that lets
DLNA-compliant media clients play video, audio, and photo
content files stored on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
The DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) group of companies
works to make products compatible and able to work in a home
network in order to make digital living easy and seamless. DLNA
clients play files stored on DLNA servers.
Port Forwarding If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your
network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the
Internet.
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 299
DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol)
Use this feature to have the CellPipe 7130 RG assign IP addresses,
an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your
network. Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server
(DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the
actual real DHCP server to the clients.
Dynamic DNS
Support With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use
a fixed URL with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this
service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.
IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of
computers. The CellPipe 7130 RG supports versions 2 and 3 of
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join
multicast groups (see RFC 2236).
Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you
turn on your CellPipe 7130 RG. You can also set the time
manually. These dates and times are then used in logs.
Logs Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the CellPipe
7130 RG to an external syslog server.
Universal Plug and
Play (UPnP) A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an
IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the
network.
QoS (Quality of
Service) You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving
bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to
particular computers.
Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTPS or FTP traffic
for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for
example) can access the CellPipe 7130 RG.
PPPoE Support
(RFC2516) PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up
connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network
configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL.
The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers
on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE
thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual
computers.
Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out
PPPoE dial on demand
Packet Filters Your device’s packet filtering function allows added network
security and management.
Table 101 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
300
VDSL Standards ITU-T G.993.1 VDSL Annex A (North American) Standard
ITU G.993.2 (2/06) VDSL2 Annex A (North American) Standard
• Corrigendum 1 (12/06) + Amendment 1 (4/07) + Amendment
1 Corrigendum 1 (7/07)
• Corrigendum 2 (7/07) + Amendment 2 (2/08) + Amendment 4
(1/09)
Supported band plans:
• Plan 997 (symmetrical)
• Plan 998 (asymmetrical)
Supported profiles: 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 17a
POTS overlay, Supported US0 types: A (normal US0), M (extended
US0), - (no US0)
ITU G.994.1 (2/07) (G.hs) Handshake
Amendment 1 (11/07) + Amendment 2 (4/08)
Supported Transport Protocol Specific Transmission Convergence
(TPS-TC) functions:
PTM (via 64/65b encapsulation method defined in IEEE
802.3ah-2004)
HDLC encapsulation for pre-VDSL2 standard interoperability
Impulse Noise Protection (INP) up to 16 symbols
SNR target met, delay maximized: The maximum allowable delay
will be 16 ms for down and 16ms for up.
Support for ITU-T G.INP
Dying Gasp support
Modulation : Multi-Carrier-Modulation (MCM)
Interleaving: General Convolution
Support of maximum SNRM configuration (directed by the central
office)
Seamless Rate Adaptation (SRA) as described in Amendment 1 of
G.993.2
Tone Spacing: 4.3KHz/8.6KHz
Table 101 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 301
ADSL Standards ADSL ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt), Annex A and ETSI TS 101 388
V1.3.1 (05/2002)
1TR112 (U-R2 Deutsche Telekom AG) Version 7.0 including
support of Dying Gasp and report of Self-Test-Result (ATU-T
Register#3)
EOC as specified in ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt)
Handshake ITU G.994.1 (G.hs)
Supported Transport Protocol Specific Transmission Convergence
(TPS-TC) functions:
ATM
PTM (via 64/65b encapsulation method defined in IEEE
802.3ah-2004)
Support of Vendor ID during Handshake in the Vendor ID
information block including vendor specific information as
specified in 1TR112 and ITU-T G.994.1 (G.hs)
ADSL ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite)
ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis), Annex A
RE-ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis), Annex L
ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.4 (G.lite.bis), Annex A
ADSL2+ ITU-T G.992.5, Annex A
Support Multi-Mode Standard: ANSI T1.413 Issue 2; G.dmt (ITU-T
G.992.1), ADSL2 (ITU-T G.992.3), ADSL2+ (ITU-T G.992.5)
Dual Latency support
Other Protocol
Support PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol
Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols
RIP I/RIP II
ICMP
ATM QoS
IP Multicasting IGMP v2 and v3
IGMP Proxy
Management Embedded Web Configurator
Remote Firmware Upgrade
Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and
configuration file backup and restore
Syslog
TR-069
TR-064
Table 101 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
302
The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in
the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Table 102 Standards Supported
STANDARD DESCRIPTION
RFC 1058 RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 1112 IGMP v1
RFC 1157 SNMPv1: Simple Network Management Protocol version 1
RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3)
RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2
RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator (NAT)
RFC 1661 The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1723 RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2.
RFC 2364 PPP over AAL5 (PPP over ATM over ADSL)
RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)
RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
RFC 2766 Network Address Translation - Protocol
IEEE 802.11 Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/
WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
IEEE 802.11b Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11g Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media
Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.11x Port Based Network Access Control.
IEEE 802.11e QoS IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service
ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard.
G dmt(G.992.1) G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)
Transceivers
ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.
ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.
ITU G.992.3
(G.dmt.bis) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the
capability of basic ADSL in data rates.
ITU G.992.4
(G.lite.bis) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the
capability of basic ADSL in data rates.
ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the
capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream
bits.
ITU-T G.993.2
(VDSL2) ITU standard that defines VDSL2.
TR-069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management.
TR-064 DSL Forum LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 303
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
304
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 305
APPENDIX A
Network Troubleshooting
Overview
The three most basic utilities for troubleshooting network connection issues are:
ipconfig, ping and tracert. This appendix gives a quick overview of them as
well as some common usage examples. Moreover, three slightly more advanced
utilities are also discussed: arp, route, and netstat.
Note: All command examples here use the Microsoft Windows operating system
version of the commands.
Before Getting Started
Before using the commands described in this section, ensure that you have the
TCP/IP networking component installed and properly configured for your network
adapter.
Click Start > Control Panel > Network Connections and then open a Local
Area Connection to display the following screen.
Figure 142 TCP/IP Networking Component
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
306
Note: Most operating systems ship with TCP/IP already installed and enabled. See
your Windows documentation for details on installing or configuring TCP/IP.
The Command Line Interface
To open the Windows command line interface:
1Click Start > Run.
2In the Run dialog box, enter cmd then click OK.
3The Command Prompt window opens.
Command Syntax and Parameters
Command descriptions always indicate the default syntax you must use when
entering them on the command line. Some commands require additional
parameters in order to execute properly. Some may have optional parameters.
Parameters are displayed as follows: command [parameter]
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 307
For example, the date command has the optional /t and date parameters. If
you do not use either of them and enter just date by itself, then the system
shows you the date it is currently using and then prompts you to change it.
However, if you use the /t parameter it just displays the date and nothing more.
To view the parameters for any given command, enter help [command].
ipconfig
The ipconfig command line utility allows you to display current network (TCP/IP)
configuration settings and, in some cases, adjust them. When you have network
connectivity problems, the first thing you should do is run this command to ensure
that your device or computer does in fact have an IP address as well as display the
source of that IP address (such as a default gateway).
Syntax: ipconfig
Parameters: ipconfig [/release] [/renew]
There are other parameters, but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
C:\>date
The current date is: 2009/10/21
Enter the new date: (mm-dd-yy)
C:\>date /t
2009/10/21
C:\>
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : example.com
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.4
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
308
Here you can see that the device has IP address of 1.1.1.1 and example.com is its
Domain Name Server (DNS).
If the device is disconnected then you would see the following instead:
If the device is connected but cannot get an IP address then you would see:
In some cases, your computer may be properly connected to the network or the
CellPipe 7130 RG but it is not receiving an IP address for whatever reason. Use the
/release parameter followed by /renew:
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Media State . . . . . . . . . . . : Media disconnected
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\>ipconfig /release
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\>ipconfig /renew
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : example.com
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 2.2.2.4
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 309
ping
The ping command line utility allows you to verify the connection and latency
between your computer and either the CellPipe 7130 RG or other devices on the
network. If you cannot reach a target using this command, then it may indicate
possible network trouble.
Syntax: ping target
The target can be an IP address or a host name.
Parameters: ping [-w timeout] target
The timeout parameter allows you to input the number of seconds (in
milliseconds) that your computer waits for a reply.
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
The number of bytes here indicates packet size. As most data is broken up into
smaller packets, this makes the ping test fairly representative of a typical network
connection. The default packet size on Windows is 32 bytes.
Time is the number of milliseconds the data requires to make the roundtrip
journey from your computer to the destination host and back again. The lower the
number, the faster the connection between the two points.
Note: Some hosts are deliberately configured to not respond to ping requests. As
such, we suggest pinging two or three hosts when performing your ping test.
C:\>ping www.example.com
Pinging a1524.g.akamai.net [203.69.113.18] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=6ms TTL=56
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=6ms TTL=56
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=6ms TTL=56
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=7ms TTL=48
Ping statistics for 203.69.113.18:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 6ms, Maximum = 7ms, Average = 6ms
>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
310
If your ping test fails to get a response, then you may see a message like this:
When a request times out it may mean:
• your computer is not connected to the network
• your Internet access device is not connected to the network
• or the device which you are pinging is not connected to the network
If you think the destination is active but responding slowly, you can try increasing
the ping timeout value from its default of 4 seconds (4000 milliseconds) to
something like 8 seconds (or 8000 milliseconds).
A long ping response could indicate network problems:
• on your side of the connection
• between the start and end points of the connection
• on the receiving end
To determine where the slowdown is, you may need to use traceroute.
C:\>ping www.example.com
Pinging www.example.com [192.0.32.10] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.0.32.10:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
C:\>
C:\>ping -w 8000 www.example.com
Pinging www.example.com [192.0.32.10] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=157ms TTL=238
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=154ms TTL=238
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=152ms TTL=236
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=162ms TTL=236
Ping statistics for 192.0.32.10:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 152ms, Maximum = 162ms, Average = 156ms
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 311
tracert
The tracert command line utility allows you to determine the network path
between your computer and a host you specify. When you communicate with
other devices on a network, the data is not often sent directly from point A to
point B; rather, it moves through a series of intermediate servers, passed along
until eventually the server closest to point B hands it off directly. This command
can be useful for helping determine whether your connection issues are happening
locally, somewhere in transit, or at the destination end.
• Each step in the chain of connections is called a ‘hop’.
• The time it takes for a server at any given hop to pass the data packet is called
‘latency’ and is measured in milliseconds.
When a tracert command is run, it sends out a burst of three data packets per
hop. The results table, therefore, always displays three values for latency in
addition to the IP address and domain name (where available) of the server on
that leg of the journey.
Syntax: tracert target
The target can be an IP address or a host name.
Parameters: tracert [-d] [-h maximumhops ] target
There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
312
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
Here, the tracert to www.example.com took 18 hops to reach its destination.
Looking at the latency data, you’ll see the first slow down happens at hop 10.
The extremely low latency on the first few hops indicates a network local to the
computer where the tracert command originated, such as a home or office LAN.
The packets then move onto the local WAN (such as your Internet Service
Provider’s network). Because of the close proximity of those servers to your
computer, the latency remains low.
Once the data packets move out of the regional network to the first international
server (at hop 10 in this example), the latency increases. This is because of the
distance between the regional and international servers - it physically takes longer
for the response to get back to your computer.
Finally, on transition hop 15 from the server in Japan to the server in California,
another latency spike occurs. If you were having connection problems, this would
most likely be the source of it. For whatever reason, the server in Japan has a less
than optimal connection with its counterpart in the United States.
C:\>tracert www.example.com
Tracing route to www.example.com [192.0.32.10]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1 <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms 172.23.x.x
2 5 ms 4 ms 5 ms 172.23.x.x
3 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms 172.23.x.x
4 5 ms 4 ms 6 ms 219-87-158-97.static.tfn.tw [219.87.158.97]
5 6 ms 5 ms 4 ms 10.42.232.150
6 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms hc-c12r2.router.tw [220.128.7.86]
7 10 ms 7 ms 10 ms tp-s2-c12r12.router.tw [220.128.2.90]
8 9 ms 7 ms 8 ms pr03-s2.tp.tw [220.128.4.181]
9 6 ms 6 ms 9 ms 220-128-3-249.NET-IP.tw [220.128.3.249]
10 138 ms 137 ms 138 ms r11-pa.NET-IP.net [211.72.108.129]
11 138 ms 138 ms 138 ms po4-0.core01.sjc04.atlas.com [154.54.11.129]
12 128 ms 139 ms 140 ms te9-2.mpd01.sjc04.atlas.com [154.54.0.173]
13 140 ms 139 ms 136 ms 61.58.33.173
14 154 ms 153 ms 137 ms xe-0-0-0.r20.gin.ntt.net [129.250.16.161]
15 154 ms 154 ms 137 ms as-2.r21.tokyjp01.jp.ntt.net [129.250.4.81]
16 562 ms 553 ms 553 ms 38.106.6.34
17 554 ms 554 ms 553 ms po-2.r00.lsanca19.us.ntt.net [129.250.6.42]
18 254 ms 254 ms 248 ms 204.1.254.150
19 154 ms 253 ms 154 ms 192.0.32.10
Trace complete.
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 313
In this example, we abridge the tracert results table to show only server IP
addresses and not domain names by using the -d parameter. We also use the -h
parameter to limit the number of hops to 5 to test local connections only.
arp
Local network transmission is based on MAC addresses. Data transmission
between two networks is based on IP addresses.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol that converts IP addresses into
MAC addresses. Before a computer transmits data to an IP address on the same
network, it will check whether the IP address exists in its ARP table. If it does, the
computer then sends the data directly to the mapped MAC address. If it does not,
the computer broadcasts an ARP request to the network. The host whose MAC
address maps to the IP address responds.
When you use ping to check the connection to a computer, no response does not
mean the computer is not alive on the network. The destination computer may be
configured not to respond to any ping requests. However, you can use the arp -a
command line utility to check the IP addresses and MAC addresses of your
neighboring computers or devices.
Syntax: arp -a
Parameters: arp [-d inet_addr] [-s inet_addr eth_addr]
The -d parameter can be use alone to remove all entries from an arp table or in
conjunction with an IP address to remove just that IP address (inet_addr). The -
s parameter allows you to add entries based on IP address (inet_addr) and/or
MAC address (eth_addr).
There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
C:\>tracert -d -h 5 www.example.com
Tracing route to a1524.g.akamai.net [203.69.113.16]
over a maximum of 5 hops:
1 <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms 172.23.31.254
2 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms 172.23.6.113
3 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 172.23.6.253
4 17 ms 16 ms 14 ms 218.160.188.254
5 24 ms 25 ms 24 ms 10.42.232.150
Trace complete.
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
314
To check the ARP table on a Windows XP computer:
1Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. The Command
Prompt screen appears.
2Type arp -a and press [Enter].
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
In this example, the Physical Address indicates the associated MAC address. A
Type entry with dynamic means it was dynamically learned through an ARP
response. Use the arp -s [inet_addr eth_addr] to manually add an ARP entry
if you want your computer to connect to the host with the specified MAC address
when you access the specified IP address.
You can additionally check whether the MAC address associated with the IP
address that you are looking for is correct. In some circumstances, your ARP table
may keep a wrong MAC address until the entry expires. You can then manually
update the ARP table.
To update the ARP table:
1Type arp -d [inet_addr] or just use arp -d to remove all entries in the ARP
table. For example, type arp -d 172.16.1.5.
2Type ping 172.16.1.5 and press [Enter].
3Next, use the arp -a command again to check whether the MAC address matches
what you expected. If it does not, another computer may be using a duplicate IP
address on the network. Change the IP address on either computer to an unused
one to fix this problem.
route
The route command line utility allows you to display or adjust your computer’s
network table. The routing table on your computer contains the default gateway
C:\>arp -a
Interface: 172.16.1.28 on Interface 0x1000003
Internet Address Physical Address Type
172.16.1.5 00-00-aa-19-07-38 dynamic
172.16.1.25 00-18-f3-f0-aa-34 dynamic
172.16.1.44 00-0e-a6-2c-60-10 dynamic
172.16.1.210 00-19-cb-e9-66-33 dynamic
172.16.1.254 00-04-80-4c-a8-05 dynamic
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 315
and other route information. When your computer wants to access an IP address
on another network, it references this table.
Syntax: route print
Parameters: For the purposes of this section, the print parameter is the most
important. If you enter route by itself, the command’s help page displays.
The following example shows the typical output of this command:
The following table describes labels shown in the command output:
C:\>route print
===========================================================================
Interface List
0x1 ........................... MS TCP Loopback interface
0x1000003 ...00 02 e3 a1 b2 c3 ...... Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet
Driver
===========================================================================
===========================================================================
Active Routes:
Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.1.254 172.16.1.32 1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
172.16.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
172.16.1.32 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
172.16.255.255 255.255.255.255 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
Default Gateway: 172.16.1.254
===========================================================================
Persistent Routes:
None
Table 103 route print Command Output
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION
Active Routes This section lists all available routes that are automatically
learned from the network.
Network Destination The destination IP address of packets that this route entry is to
route. The destination can be an IP address for a network or host,
0.0.0.0 for the default route or 127.0.0.0 for the loopback
interface which is used mainly for self-test.
The destination 224.0.0.0 is for multicasting packets or reserved
for testing. But if you are not using multicast applications, just
ignore it.
The destination 255.255.255.255 is used to find computers when
an IP address is not known. For example, before the DHCP IP
address of your computer is determined, your computer sends
packets with the destination looking for DHCP servers on the
network.
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
316
In this example, the 172.16.1.0 is the network address. The 172.16.1.32 is the
address of the local computer. 172.16.1.255 is the network broadcast address
which sends broadcast packets to all computers on the 172.16.1.x network.
172.16.1.254 is the default gateway.
You may have more than one 0.0.0.0 entry if your computer has two or more
network cards installed. This may casue packets to be routed somewhere
unexpected. Delete all 0.0.0.0 entries except the one that you want to use for the
default gateway. In the following example, the computer uses the first 0.0.0.0
entry for the default gateway.
• To delete the route to the default route with the gateway of 192.168.1.254,
type: route delete 0.0.0.0 mask 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.254.
• To add a route to the destination 172.16.2.0 with the subnet mask of
255.255.255.0, the next hop address of 172.16.1.250, and the cost metric of 7,
type: route add 172.16.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.250 metric 7.
• To add a persistent route to the destination 172.16.3.0 with the subnet mask of
255.255.255.0 and the next hop address of 172.16.1.252, type: route -p add
172.16.3.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.252.
Note that the metric will be set to 1 if you do not specify any.
Netmask The destination subnet mask of packets that this route entry is to
route. The subnet mask can be the apropriate subnet mask for a
network, 255.255.255.255 for a host, or 0.0.0.0 for the default
route.
Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer
should send the matched packets.
Interface The IP address of an physical interface on this computer used to
send the matched packets for this route entry.
Metric The metric (hop count) of this route. Normally, the lower the
number, the faster to a destination.
Default Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer sends
all the rest packets if this computer cannot find any other
matched routes for the packets.
Persistent Routes This section lists all routes that are manually configured.
Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.254 192.168.1.33 1
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.1.254 172.16.1.32 1
Table 103 route print Command Output
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 317
netstat
The netstat command line utility is used to show Ethernet statistics and current
TCP/IP network connections.
Syntax: netstat
With no parameters, this command simply displays only active statistics for ports
that are currently in use by one process or another.
Parameter: netstat [-a] [-e]
The -a parameter displays all available listening ports and connections whether
they are active or not, while the -e parameter displays Ethernet statistics.
There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
C:\>netstat
Active Connections
Proto Local Address Foreign Address State
TCP COMPUTERA:1056 localhost:5091 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:1091 localhost:27015 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:1120 localhost:40000 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3243 localhost:3244 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3244 localhost:3243 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3246 localhost:3247 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3247 localhost:3246 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:5091 localhost:1056 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:5152 localhost:3245 CLOSE_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:27015 localhost:1091 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:40000 localhost:1120 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3229 172.20.0.201:http CLOSE_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:3234 172.16.1.29:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3237 172.16.1.29:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3240 172.16.1.29:1155 ESTABLISHED
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
318
Use the -a parameter to display all possible connections to your device, not just
the ones that are currently in use:
The following table describes the three entries in the output example above:
C:\>netstat -a
Active Connections
Proto Local Address Foreign Address State
TCP COMPUTERA:http COMPUTERA:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:http 172.16.x.x:4036 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:2744 NAS:microsoft-ds ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:5152 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:5152 localhost:4067 CLOSE_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:5354 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:27015 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:40000 localhost:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:40000 localhost:1120 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn 172.16.x.x.example.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:4177 172.16.x.x:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4178 172.16.x.x:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4180 172.16.x.x:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4182 172.16.x.x:1025 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4317 NAS:microsoft-ds ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4539 NAS:microsoft-ds TIME_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn 172.16.x.x:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn 172.16.x.x:0 LISTENING
C:\>
Table 104 netstat -a Command Output
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION
TCP
COMPUTERA:http
COMPUTERA:0
LISTENING
A web server is available on COMPUTERA as an HTTP
service is in a LISTENING state.
TCP
COMPUTERA:http
172.16.1.29:4036
ESTABLISHED
A computer with an IP address of 172.16.1.29 is accessing the
web service on the COMPUTERA.
TCP
COMPUTERA:2744
NAS:microsoft-ds
ESTABLISHED
COMPUTERA has established a TCP/IP NETBIOS connection
(microsoft-ds) with a NAS device.
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 319
Additionally, you can use netstat -e to display Ethernet statistics as the following
example.
C:\ >netstat -e
Interface Statistics
Received Sent
Bytes 25250033 7060325
Unicast packets 38838 34744
Non-unicast packets 38227 175
Discards 0 0
Errors 0 35
Unknown protocols 787
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
320
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 321
APPENDIX B
Setting Up Your Computer’s IP
Address
Note: Your specific CellPipe 7130 RG may not support all of the operating systems
described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information
about which operating systems are supported.
This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in
order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network.
Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include
the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure
that your network’s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same
subnet.
In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:
•Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 321
•Windows Vista on page 325
•Windows 7 on page 329
•Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 333
•Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 337
•Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 340
•Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 345
Windows XP/NT/2000
The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also
apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
322
1Click Start > Control Panel.
Figure 143 Windows XP: Start Menu
2In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon.
Figure 144 Windows XP: Control Panel
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 323
3Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Figure 145 Windows XP: Control Panel > Network Connections > Properties
4On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click
Properties.
Figure 146 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
324
5The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens.
Figure 147 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
6Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP
assigns your IP address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask,
and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to
you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred
DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.
7Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
8Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
1Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 325
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a
network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP
address and connection information.
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional.
1Click Start > Control Panel.
Figure 148 Windows Vista: Start Menu
2In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon.
Figure 149 Windows Vista: Control Panel
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
326
3Click the Network and Sharing Center icon.
Figure 150 Windows Vista: Network And Internet
4Click Manage network connections.
Figure 151 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
5Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Figure 152 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen
saying that it needs your permission to continue.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 327
6Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.
Figure 153 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
328
7The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
Figure 154 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
8Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP
assigns your IP address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask,
and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to
you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred
DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was
provided.Click Advanced.
9Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
1Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 329
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a
network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP
address and connection information.
Windows 7
This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise.
1Click Start > Control Panel.
Figure 155 Windows 7: Start Menu
2In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks under the
Network and Internet category.
Figure 156 Windows 7: Control Panel
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
330
3Click Change adapter settings.
Figure 157 Windows 7: Network And Sharing Center
4Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Figure 158 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Status
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen
saying that it needs your permission to continue.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 331
5Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.
Figure 159 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Properties
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
332
6The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
Figure 160 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
7Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP
assigns your IP address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask,
and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to
you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred
DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.
Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS.
8Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
9Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
1Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 333
3The IP settings are displayed as follows.
Figure 161 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4
The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3.
1Click Apple > System Preferences.
Figure 162 Mac OS X 10.4: Apple Menu
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
334
2In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon.
Figure 163 Mac OS X 10.4: System Preferences
3When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the
network connection type list, and then click Configure.
Figure 164 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 335
4For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4
list in the TCP/IP tab.
Figure 165 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > TCP/IP Tab.
5For statically assigned settings, do the following:
•From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually.
•In the IP Address field, type your IP address.
•In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
336
•In the Router field, type the IP address of your device.
Figure 166 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > Ethernet
6Click Apply Now and close the window.
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network
Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info
tab.
Figure 167 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 337
Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6
The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6.
1Click Apple > System Preferences.
Figure 168 Mac OS X 10.5: Apple Menu
2In System Preferences, click the Network icon.
Figure 169 Mac OS X 10.5: Systems Preferences
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
338
3When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of
available connection types.
Figure 170 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet
4From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings.
5For statically assigned settings, do the following:
•From the Configure list, select Manually.
•In the IP Address field, enter your IP address.
•In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 339
•In the Router field, enter the IP address of your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Figure 171 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet
6Click Apply and close the window.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
340
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network
Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info
tab.
Figure 172 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility
Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME)
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the
GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution.
The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific
distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens
use the default Ubuntu 8 installation.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 341
1Click System > Administration > Network.
Figure 173 Ubuntu 8: System > Administration Menu
2When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the
Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.)
You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin
password.
Figure 174 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
342
3In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then
click the Authenticate button.
Figure 175 Ubuntu 8: Administrator Account Authentication
4In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to
configure, then click Properties.
Figure 176 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 343
5The Properties dialog box opens.
Figure 177 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Properties
•In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you
have a dynamic IP address.
•In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP
address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields.
6Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to
the Network Settings screen.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
344
7If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network
Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields
provided.
Figure 178 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > DNS
8Click the Close button to apply the changes.
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network
Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 345
tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working
properly.
Figure 179 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools
Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE)
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the K
Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The
procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific
distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens
use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
346
1Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST).
Figure 180 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu
2When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and
click OK.
Figure 181 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 347
3When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and
then click the Network Card icon.
Figure 182 openSUSE 10.3: YaST Control Center
4When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the
appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button.
Figure 183 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
348
5When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab
Figure 184 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup
6Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.
Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the
IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields.
7Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 349
8If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in
Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields
provided.
Figure 185 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings
9Click Finish to save your settings and close the window.
Verifying Settings
Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP
properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information.
Figure 186 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
350
When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the
Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly.
Figure 187 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 351
APPENDIX C
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts
and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service
Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP
address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off
Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 188 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in
the Privacy tab.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
352
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
2Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen.
This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 189 Internet Options: Privacy
3Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the
following steps.
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 353
2Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 190 Internet Options: Privacy
3Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have
blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
354
4Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 191 Pop-up Blocker Settings
5Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check
that JavaScripts are allowed.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 355
1In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 192 Internet Options: Security
2Click the Custom Level... button.
3Scroll down to Scripting.
4Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the
default).
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
356
6Click OK to close the window.
Figure 193 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
1From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security
tab.
2Click the Custom Level... button.
3Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 357
5Click OK to close the window.
Figure 194 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
1From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced
tab.
2Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
358
3Click OK to close the window.
Figure 195 Java (Sun)
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.
You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then
click Options in the screen that appears.
Figure 196 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 359
Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the
following screen.
Figure 197 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
360
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 361
APPENDIX D
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to
communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as
hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network.
You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host
ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the
hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house
has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique
identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network
the packets are delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for
example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is
an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal
notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or
0 to 255 in decimal.
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
362
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Figure 198 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID
varies according to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number,
and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term
“subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the
corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the
subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host
ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in
bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 105 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example
1ST
OCTET:
(192)
2ND
OCTET:
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
(1)
4TH
OCTET
(2)
IP Address (Binary) 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000
Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001
Host ID 00000010
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 363
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones
beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of
zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits
with a “1” value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the
mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The
following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit
and 29-bit subnet masks.
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible
hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number
bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network
(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host
IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a
24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the
maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 106 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET 2ND
OCTET 3RD
OCTET 4TH
OCTET
8-bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255.0.0.0
16-bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0
24-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0
29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248
Table 107 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
HOSTS
8 bits 255.0.0.0 24 bits 224 – 2 16777214
16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 216 – 2 65534
24 bits 255.255.255.0 8 bits 28 – 2 254
29 bits 255.255.255.248 3 bits 23 – 2 6
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
364
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left,
followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask,
you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each
octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in
the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask
255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the
following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a
group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three
octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining
octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
Table 108 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION LAST OCTET
(BINARY) LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0 /24 0000 0000 0
255.255.255.128 /25 1000 0000 128
255.255.255.192 /26 1100 0000 192
255.255.255.224 /27 1110 0000 224
255.255.255.240 /28 1111 0000 240
255.255.255.248 /29 1111 1000 248
255.255.255.252 /30 1111 1100 252
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 365
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 199 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into
two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or
/25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two
subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25.
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now
two sub-networks, A and B.
Figure 200 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
366
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of
27 – 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself,
all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127
with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP
address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and
the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit
address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets,
you need to “borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01,
10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a
host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast
address).
Table 109 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal) 192.168.1. 0
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
Table 110 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 64
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 367
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100,
101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 111 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 128
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 112 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 192
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001
. 11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111
. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Table 113 Eight Subnets
SUBNET SUBNET
ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST
ADDRESS BROADCAST
ADDRESS
1 0 1 30 31
232 33 62 63
364 65 94 95
496 97 126 127
5128 129 158 159
6160 161 190 191
7192 193 222 223
8224 225 254 255
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
368
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit
network number.
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit
network number.
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If
the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP
Table 114 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1255.255.255.128 (/25) 2126
2255.255.255.192 (/26) 462
3255.255.255.224 (/27) 830
4255.255.255.240 (/28) 16 14
5255.255.255.248 (/29) 32 6
6255.255.255.252 (/30) 64 2
7255.255.255.254 (/31) 128 1
Table 115 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1255.255.128.0 (/17) 232766
2255.255.192.0 (/18) 416382
3255.255.224.0 (/19) 88190
4255.255.240.0 (/20) 16 4094
5255.255.248.0 (/21) 32 2046
6255.255.252.0 (/22) 64 1022
7255.255.254.0 (/23) 128 510
8255.255.255.0 (/24) 256 254
9255.255.255.128 (/25) 512 126
10 255.255.255.192 (/26) 1024 62
11 255.255.255.224 (/27) 2048 30
12 255.255.255.240 (/28) 4096 14
13 255.255.255.248 (/29) 8192 6
14 255.255.255.252 (/30) 16384 2
15 255.255.255.254 (/31) 32768 1
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 369
addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet
mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you
have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when
the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select
a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned
Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private
use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must
also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the CellPipe 7130 RG.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your
CellPipe 7130 RG that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make
sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
CellPipe 7130 RG will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP
address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by
the CellPipe 7130 RG unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are
isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example)
you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three
blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned
from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet
access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for
your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger
organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP
addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466,
Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
370
IP Address Conflicts
Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate
IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other
resources. The devices may also be unreachable through the network.
Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example
computer A has a static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address
that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can
access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP
address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address
automatically.
Figure 201 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different
network numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet
(WAN), the router’s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 371
following example, the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet. The LAN computers
cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks.
Figure 202 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example,
the computer and the router’s LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address.
The computer cannot access the Internet. This problem can be solved by
assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router’s LAN port.
Figure 203 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
372
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 373
APPENDIX E
Wireless LANs
Note: Your specific CellPipe 7130 RG may not support all of the wireless security
types described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more
information about which wireless security types are supported.
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects
a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless
adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network,
which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service
Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers
using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 204 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless
clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one
access point (AP).
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
374
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is
enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate
with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still
access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 205 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each
containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired
network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access
Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate
wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 375
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and
their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID
in order to communicate.
Figure 206 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and
receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have
a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from
an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when
radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and
degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap,
your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an
adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent
AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access
point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
376
hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or
wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each
other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
Figure 207 RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is
already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time,
collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time,
resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS
defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To
Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432
bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then
responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range
to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the
requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP
without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on
your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra
network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send)
handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see
next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never
occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 377
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256
and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will
fragment the packet into smaller data frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to
interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or
networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see
previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send)
handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach
RTS/CTS size.
Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer
to the length of the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means
more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support
long preamble, but not all support short preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices
on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy
wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it,
and to provide more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless
devices on the network support it, otherwise the CellPipe 7130 RG uses long
preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to
communicate.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an
IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point
(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
378
several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates.
The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication
between wireless clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the CellPipe 7130 RG are data encryption,
wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding
the CellPipe 7130 RG identity.
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security
methods available on your CellPipe 7130 RG.
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the CellPipe 7130 RG
and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of
IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional
Table 116 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE
(MBPS) MODULATION
1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11 CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Table 117 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL SECURITY TYPE
Least
Secure
Most Secure
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server
Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 379
accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of
network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138,
2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network
RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows
additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access
point or the wireless clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication,
authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the
RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are
connected to the network.
•Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay
between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point
and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access.
The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another
Access-Request message.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
380
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point
and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
•Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a
shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over
the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is
also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS,
EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all
authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on
top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of
user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS
server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform
authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an
intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. .
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the
network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate
(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues
certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The
authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client
‘proves’ that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge
and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication
server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus
someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In
addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5
authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 381
authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session
key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless
clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client.
After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to
the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured
tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital
certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle
certificates, which imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for
only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client
authentication is then done by sending username and password through the
secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-
TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure
connection, then use simple username and password methods through the
secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity.
However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2
and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of
IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key
expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication
times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key
in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store
keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
382
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and
PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate
environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair
is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of
authentication types.
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption,
authentication and key management than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and
user authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external
RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an
external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that
only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless
gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will
be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK
depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2.
WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP),
Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when
Table 118 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP LEAP
Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Certificate – Client No Yes Optional Optional No
Certificate – Server No Yes Yes Yes No
Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate
Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate
Client Identity
Protection No No Yes Yes No
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 383
required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block
chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the
authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that
uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-
packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an
extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same
encryption key is never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that
then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to
dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet
that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all
happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from
capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a
strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each
compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the
data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating
an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to
decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break
into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The
only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common
password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach
makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it’s
still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric
password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption
keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a
weakness of WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to
authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces
the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake)
and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2
authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
384
authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all
wireless devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a
successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries
to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication
process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already
connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP
before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system
instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most
widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's
Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows
XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows
XP to use it.
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number
(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example
with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is
the distribution system.
1The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and
grants or denies network access accordingly.
3A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by
the RADIUS server and the client.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 385
4The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate
unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that
is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.
Figure 208 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared
Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal
characters (including spaces and symbols).
2The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network
only if the password matches.
3The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The
key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
386
4The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and
information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They
use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them.
Figure 209 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for
each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address
filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features.
Table 119 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOL
ENCRYPTIO
N METHOD ENTER
MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X
Open None No Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes Disable
Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes Disable
WPA TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
WPA2 TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 387
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device
sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air.
The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a
wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz
(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the
antenna’s coverage area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF
beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better
communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase
of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in
gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary
depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna
increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic
antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well
in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
388
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal
plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these
antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible
to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does
with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the
coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to
120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and
outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of
obstructions. In point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same
height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the
antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the
antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as
close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired
coverage area.
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 389
APPENDIX F
Common Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated
protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/
code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority)
web site.
•Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or
create a different one, if you like.
•Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/
UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is
USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.
•Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for
further information about port numbers.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
•Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service
or the situations in which this service is used.
Table 120 Commonly Used Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication
Header) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
AIM/New-ICQ TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It
is also used as a listening port by
ICQ.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP
UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution
from White Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation
Security Protocol) tunneling protocol
uses this service.
Appendix F Common Services
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
390
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out
if a user is logged on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Program, a program to
enable fast transfer of files, including
large files that may not be possible by
e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a
client/server protocol for the world
wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often
used in e-commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1Internet Control Message Protocol is
often used for diagnostic or routing
purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat
program.
IGMP
(MULTICAST) User-Defined 2Internet Group Management Protocol
is used when sending packets to a
specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm
is used for key distribution and
management.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger
service uses this protocol.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that
provides transparent file sharing for
network environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is
the delivery mechanism for the
USENET newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1Packet INternet Groper is a protocol
that sends out ICMP echo requests to
test whether or not a remote host is
reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a
client computer get e-mail from a
POP3 server through a temporary
connection (TCP/IP or other).
Table 120 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix F Common Services
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 391
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
enables secure transfer of data over
public networks. This is the control
channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol) enables secure transfer of
data over public networks. This is the
data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that
enables real time sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media
control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote
control for multimedia on the
Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management
Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP
(RFC:1215).
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an
interface to access data on many
different types of database systems,
including mainframes, midrange
systems, UNIX systems and network
servers.
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs
to a UNIX server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control
System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal
emulation protocol common on the
Internet and in UNIX environments. It
operates over TCP/IP networks. Its
primary function is to allow users to
log into remote host systems.
Table 120 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix F Common Services
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
392
TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an
Internet file transfer protocol similar
to FTP, but uses the UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution.
Table 120 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 393
APPENDIX G
Legal Information
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy,
and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which
can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
3Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
4Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Appendix G Legal Information
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
394
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-
limited to channels 1 through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation
distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this
device and all persons.
Industry Canada Statement
This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause interference and
2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device
This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum
gain of 2dBi.
Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry
Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain
should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful
communication.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Device for the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential
for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems; users should also
be cautioned to take note that high-power radars are allocated as primary users
(meaning they have priority) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz
and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
IC Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating
instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.
注意 !
依據 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
Appendix G Legal Information
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 395
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用。
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC
region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
For a Class B digital device or peripheral, the instructions furnished the user shall
include the following or similar statement, placed in a prominent location in the text of
the manual:
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
(c) The provisions of paragraphs (a) and (b) do not apply to digital devices exempted
from the technical standards under the provisions of Section 15.103.
(d) For systems incorporating several digital devices, the statement shown in
paragraph (a) or (b) needs to be contained only in the instruction manual for the main
control unit.
(e) In cases where the manual is provided only in a form other than paper, such as on
a computer disk or over the Internet, the information required by this section may be
included in the manual in that alternative form, provided the user can reasonably be
expected to have the capability to access information in that form.
RF exposure warning
This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions
and the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation
distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be
provide with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for
satisfying RF exposure compliance.
Appendix G Legal Information
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
396
Index
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 397
Index
A
ACS 239
ADSL
compliance 301
dual latency 301
EOC 301
multi-mode 301
TPS-TC 301
vendor ID 301
Advanced Encryption Standard
See AES.
AES 383
ALG 177
alternative subnet mask notation 364
antenna 297
directional 388
gain 387
omni-directional 388
AP (access point) 375
Application Layer Gateway 177
applications
Internet access 20
media server 187
iTunes server 23
arp 313
ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5) 124
Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 239
B
backup 278
Basic Service Set, See BSS 373
blinking LEDs 26
broadcast 129
BSS 373
C
CA 197, 381
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) 109
CCMs 283
certificate
details 202
factory default 198
Certificate Authority
See CA.
certificates 197
authentication 197
CA
creating 199
importing 200, 203
public key 197
replacing 198
storage space 198
Certification Authority 197
Certification Authority. see CA
certifications 393
notices 395
CFI 129
CFM 283
CCMs 283
link trace test 284
loopback test 284
MA 283
MD 283
MEP 283
MIP 283
channel 375
interference 375
channel ID 143
CIFS 182
CIFS (Common Internet File System) 183, 188,
189
command parameters 306
command syntax 306
Index
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
398
Common Internet File System (CIFS) 183, 188,
189
Common Internet File System, see CIFS
compliance 300
configuration 132, 135
Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs
copyright 393
CoS 234
CoS technologies 221
CPU usage 93
creating certificates 199
CTS (Clear to Send) 376
D
date and time 93
default 280
default LAN IP address 84
DHCP 99, 132, 135, 237
DHCP client 99
DHCP client list 99
DHCP relay 299
DHCP server 299
diagnostic 284, 287
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 234
DiffServ 234
marking rule 235
digital IDs 197
DLNA 23
DNS 132
DNS server address assignment 129
Domain Name 178
domain name system
see DNS
Domain Name System. See DNS.
DS field 235
DS, dee differentiated services
DSCP 234
DSL interface 104
dynamic DNS 237
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. See
DHCP.
dynamic WEP key exchange 381
DYNDNS wildcard 237
E
EAP Authentication 380
ECHO 178
Encapsulation 123
MER 123
PPP over Ethernet 123
PPPoA 124
encapsulation
RFC 1483 124
encryption 382
WEP 147
end-to-end loopback test 287
ESS 374
ESSID 93
Extended Service Set IDentification 144
Extended Service Set, See ESS 374
F
F4 cells 287
F5 cells 287
FCC interference statement 393
file sharing 23, 183, 188, 189
Finger 178
firmware
upload 276
upload error 277
firmware version 92
fragmentation threshold 377
FTP 172, 178
H
hidden node 375
host 268
host name 92
HTTP 178, 191, 192
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) 276
Index
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 399
humidity 297
I
IANA 136, 369
IBSS 373
IEEE 802.11g 377
IEEE 802.1Q 128
IGMP 129, 132
version 129
IGMP proxy 301
IGMP snooping 262
IGMP v1 301
IGMP v2 301
importing certificates 200, 203
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS 373
initialization vector (IV) 383
install UPnP 247
Windows Me 247
Windows XP 248
internal routing table 96
Internet access 20
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
See IANA 369
internet mode 102, 104
DSL
ATM 102
PTM 102
ethernet 103
IP Address 176
IP address 135
IP Address Assignment 126
IP filter
basics 191
creating or eiding rules 194
introduction 191
policies 192
IP multicasting 301
IP pool 134
IP pool setup 135
ipconfig 307
ipconfig, release 308
ipconfig, renew 308
iTunes server 23
L
LAN statistics 98
LAN TCP/IP 135
LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 241
LBR 284
link trace 284
Link Trace Message, see LTM
Link Trace Response, see LTR
logs 271
overview 271
settings 272
Loop Back Response, see LBR
loopback 284
LTM 284
LTR 284
M
MA 283
MAC 92
MAC address 92
MAC address filter action 151
MAC filter 150, 151
Maintenance Association, see MA
Maintenance Domain, see MD
Maintenance End Point, see MEP
managing the device
good habits 20
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 110, 125
MD 283
media server 187
DLNA 187
enable 189
memory usage 93
MEP 283
Message Integrity Check (MIC) 382
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 128
multicast 129, 132
multiplexing 124
Index
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
400
LLC-based 124
VC-based 124
multiprotocol encapsulation 124
N
NAT 136, 171, 369
default server 176
DMZ host 176
external port 173
internal port 173
port forwarding 172
port number 172, 178
services 178
Symmetric 127
NAT example 179
NAT traversal 245
netstat 317
Network Address Translation, see NAT
network troubleshooting 305
arp 313
ipconfig 307
netstat 317
ping 309
route 314
tracert 311
NNTP 178
O
OAM 287
OAM ping test 287
operation humidity 297
operation temperature 297
Operation, Administration and Maintenance,
see OAM
P
Packet Transfer Mode 104
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 383, 385
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 109, 125
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 235
PHB 235
ping 309
timeout 310
Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation
Layer 5 (AAL5) 124
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 178
POP3 178, 191, 192
ports 26
power adaptor 302
power specifications 297
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer
Protocol 301
PPPoE 124
Benefits 124
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet)
299
PPTP 178
preamble mode 377
print server 23
PSK 383
PTM 104
Q
QoS 219, 234
marking 221
setup 219
tagging 221
versus CoS 221
Quality of Service, see QoS
Quick Start Guide 84
R
RADIUS 379
message types 379
messages 379
shared secret key 380
related documentation 3
remote management
TR-069 239
Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 239
Index
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 401
restore 278
RFC 1058. See RIP.
RFC 1389. See RIP.
RFC 1483 124
RFC 1631 171
RFC 2131. See DHCP.
RFC 2132. See DHCP
RFC 2516 299
RIP 132, 217
Routing Information Protocol
see RIP
route 314
route status 96
router features 20
routing information 96
Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
RPPCs 239
RTS (Request To Send) 376
threshold 375, 376
S
safety warnings 6
segment loopback test 287
service access control 242
Service Set 144
Services 178
sharing files 183, 188, 189
SIP ALG 177
SIP Application Layer Gateway 177
SMTP 178
SNMP 178, 301
SNMP trap 178
static route 209, 213, 217
static VLAN
status indicators 26
storage humidity 297
storage temperature 297
subnet 361
subnet mask 135, 362
subnetting 364
Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) 110
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 125
Symmetric NAT 127
Symmetric NAT, Outgoing 128
syntax conventions 4
system name 92
T
Tag Control Information See TCI
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
TCI
TCP/IP 191
temperature 297
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 382
TPID 128
TR-064 241
TR-069 239
ACS setup 239
authentication 240
tracert 311
traffic shaping 125
transparent bridging 301
U
unicast 129
Universal Plug and Play 245
application 246
UPnP 245
forum 246
security issues 246
USB device removal 188
USB features 23
USB printer 23
user levels 83
admin 83
installer 83
priviledged 83
root 83
subscriber 83
tech 83
Index
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide
402
V
VCI 287
VDSL 300
band plans 300
HDLC 300
INP 300
MCM 300
profiles 300
SNR 300
SNRM 300
SRA 300
tone spacing 300
TPS-TC 300
US0 types 300
VID
virtual channel 287
Virtual Circuit (VC) 124
virtual circuits 287
terminology 287
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
virtual path 287
VLAN 128
Introduction 128
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
static
VLAN ID 128
VLAN Identifier See VID
VLAN tag 128
VPI 287
W
WAN (Wide Area Network) 101
WAN interface 95
WAN statistics 94
Web Configurator 83, 84
WEP encryption 148
Wi-Fi Protected Access 382
Windows Command Prompt 306
arp 313
command parameters 306
ipconfig 307
netstat 317
ping 309
route 314
tracert 311
wireless client WPA supplicants 384
wireless security 378
wireless station list 97
Wireless tutorial 29
WLAN
interference 375
security parameters 386
WLAN button 28
WPA 382
key caching 384
pre-authentication 384
user authentication 383
vs WPA-PSK 383
wireless client supplicant 384
with RADIUS application example 384
WPA2 382
user authentication 383
vs WPA2-PSK 383
wireless client supplicant 384
with RADIUS application example 384
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 382
WPA2-PSK 382, 383
application example 385
WPA-PSK 382, 383
application example 385
WPS
status 93
Index
CellPipe 7130 RG User’s Guide 403